JP2019088528A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that contributes to an increase in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes operation means operable by a player, and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. The game machine includes predetermined performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance during the advantageous state. The execution mode of the predetermined performance can be changed on the basis of operation of the operation means. Further, the game machine includes a movable body displaceably provided in an area between a first position and a second position different from the first position, position detection means for detecting that the movable body is positioned at the first position, and displacement control means for controlling displacement of the movable body and capable of performing repetitive displacement control for repetitively displacing the movable body a plurality of times. The displacement control means, when performing repetitive displacement control in which repetitive displacement is performed for the movable body from the first position, displaces the movable body out of the detection area in the position detection means in at least one displacement in the repetitive displacement.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 43

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a conventional pachinko game machine, when the big hit is consecutive, the number of consecutive big jacks (the number of times the large hit gaming state is controlled during continuous shooting, hereinafter, it is simply referred to as a "big hit" being controlled to the big hit gaming state There is also a gaming machine that displays. Among the gaming machines of this type, there are gaming machines that display a display according to the type of the big hit in the order in which the big hit was performed in displaying the number of consecutive hits of the big hit (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-93685, A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, when displaying the number of consecutive hits of the big hit, the display according to the type of big hit is merely executed in the order in which the big hit was performed. For this reason, even if the number of consecutive big hits is displayed, it is lacking in interest and does not contribute much to the improvement of game entertainment.

  Therefore, the problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that contributes to the improvement of the amusement of the game.

(1) A gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) includes an operation means (for example, push button 31B or the like) operable by the player, For example, it is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a big hit gaming state etc.), and a predetermined effect (for example, a first predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (A) and a second predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (B)) And the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be changed based on the operation of the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 43A). 43 (A) switches to a second predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (B) by operating the push button 31B), and further, a first position (for example, a retracted position), and A second position different from the first position ( For example, it is detected that the movable body (for example, the effect body 90300) provided displaceably in the range between the first advancing position and the second advancing position) and the movable body are located at the first position. Detection means (for example, the first photosensor 90203) for controlling the displacement of the movable body, and it is possible to perform repetitive displacement control to repeatedly displace the movable body a plurality of times Displacement control means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes a prophetic effect shown in FIG. 85), and the displacement control means repeatedly displaces the movable body from the first position. (E.g., as shown in FIG. 83), the movable body is displaced out of the detection area of the position detection means in at least one displacement in the repetitive displacement. The by running in either the effect pattern α~ effect pattern gamma, and wherein the portion for moving the directing body 90300 outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90 203) at least once.

  According to this configuration, since effects can be made according to the player's preferences, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the game interest. Also, even if the movable body is repeatedly displaced in the vicinity of the first position, it is possible to detect that the movable body has repeatedly displaced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
The predetermined effect execution means is an effect (for example, a figure that can specify the number of times (for example, the number of consecutive large jackpots) controlled in an advantageous state during a predetermined period (for example, consecutive large jacks) as the predetermined effect. As shown in 43 (A), the big hit icon is displayed in parallel the same number of times as the number of consecutive times, or as shown in FIG. 43 (B), the big hit icon and the number of times controlled to the big hit gaming state are displayed together Effect may be performed.

  According to this configuration, since it is easy to confirm the number of times of control to the advantageous state, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
An effect capable of displaying the predetermined effect and a specific effect different from the predetermined effect (for example, the first specific effect shown in FIG. 42A and the second specific effect shown in FIG. 42C) A display means (for example, an image display device 5 etc.) is provided, and as a display mode of the predetermined effect on the effect display means, a first display mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 43A) A big hit icon (for example, as shown in FIG. 43B), a display mode etc. displayed in parallel at the upper left of the device 5 and a second display mode that is less likely to hinder the display of the specific effect than the first display mode. And 300) may be included in a display mode or the like collectively displayed at the lower right corner of the image display device 5.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to change to a mode in which it is difficult to inhibit the specific effect, so effects can be made according to the player's preference, which can contribute to the improvement of the game interest.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the display position of the predetermined effect in the effect display means is a first position (for example, the upper left position in the image display device 5),
The second display mode is a second position where the display position of the predetermined effect in the effect display means is less likely to inhibit the specific effect than the first position (for example, the position of the lower right corner in the image display device 5) You may make it be a display mode.

  According to this configuration, since it is possible to change to a position where it is difficult to inhibit the specific effect, it is possible to perform the effect according to the player's preference and to contribute to the improvement of the game interest.

(5) In the gaming machine of (3) or (4) above,
The display area of the second display mode (for example, the display area when the big hit icon 300 is displayed collectively as shown in FIG. 43B) is the display area of the first display mode (for example, FIG. As shown in A), the display area may be smaller than the display area when the big hit icon 300 is displayed in parallel.

  According to this configuration, since it is possible to change the mode in which the area to be inhibited to the specific effect is different, it is possible to perform the effect according to the player's preference and to contribute to the improvement of the game fun.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (3) to (5),
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in parallel to make it possible to specify the number of times of control to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 43A) Display mode etc. displayed in parallel at the upper left of the device 5),
The second display mode is a display mode in which the second display is displayed collectively so as to be less likely to be covered by the specific effect than the first display mode, and the number of times controlled in the advantageous state can be specified (for example, FIG. 43 (B), the display mode etc. in which the big hit icon 300 is displayed collectively at the lower right corner of the image display device 5),
The display mode of the predetermined effect displayed on the effect display means can be switched between the first display mode and the second display mode based on the operation of the operation means (for example, FIG. 43A) As shown in FIG. 43, the operation may be switched from the first predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (A) to the second predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (B) by operating the push button 31B.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to match the execution mode of the predetermined effect to the preference of the player, which can contribute to the improvement of the interest.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (3) to (6) above,
A plurality of types of the advantageous state (for example, the first big hit gaming state and the second big hit gaming state, etc.),
The first display mode indicates the number of gaming media acquired in the advantageous state (for example, the first jackpot gaming state or the like, as well as the type of the transitioned advantageous state (for example, the first jackpot gaming state or the second jackpot gaming state). The display mode (for example, the number of the first past prize balls displayed immediately below the first jackpot icon 301 and the second jackpot icon 302 for displayably indicating the total number of prize balls paid out in the second jackpot gaming state) A display mode in which the first past prize ball number and the second past prize ball number are displayed in the display area 301A and the second past prize ball number display area 302A.
The second display mode is a display mode (for example, the first jackpot icon 301 and the like) which displays the sum according to the type of the advantageous state and the sum of the number of gaming media acquired for each type of the advantageous state It may be a display mode in which “× N” (N is an integer) is sequentially displayed on the lower right of the image display device 5 on the right side of the second jackpot icon 302.

  According to the above configuration, the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be adjusted to the preference of the player, which can contribute to the improvement of the interest.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (3) to (7) above,
The specific effects are of multiple types (such as the first specific effect shown in FIG. 42A and the second specific effect shown in FIG. 42B),
The specific effect can be selected based on an operation different from the operation for changing the display mode of the predetermined effect (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A shown in FIG. 42A) (shown in FIG. 42A) It may be possible to select by switching either of the jackpot first specified effect and the jackpot second specified effect shown in FIG. 42 (B).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the specific effect being inhibited by the predetermined effect.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Effect state control means (e.g., e.g., A mode or B mode in FIG. 45, etc.) capable of controlling an effect state (e.g., effect state in round) in the advantageous state (e.g., A mode or B mode in FIG. 45) , Microcomputers for effect control, etc.),
Execute a notification effect (for example, a notification effect by the first notification image 204 or the second notification image 214 shown in FIG. 45, etc.) related to the number of game media (for example, the number of game balls etc.) given during the advantageous state A notification effect means (for example, a microcomputer for effect control, etc.);
The notification effect means is
When being controlled to the first effect state (for example, A mode and the like) by the effect state control means, the notification effect by the first notification mode (for example, the first notification image 204 and the like shown in FIG. 45) is executed
When the rendering state control means is controlled to a second rendering state (for example, B mode etc.) different from the first rendering state, a second notification mode (for example, FIG. 45) different from the first notification mode The notification effect based on the second notification image 214 shown) may be executed.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state by the notification effect corresponding to the effect state.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (9), a predetermined area (for example, the first start winning opening or the like) to which a value is given when gaming media (for example, gaming balls etc.) pass. It is possible to display the second start winning opening, the big winning opening, the general winning opening in the second modification, etc., and predetermined information (for example, combination ratio, winning ratio, etc.) regarding the value given by passing the game medium to the predetermined area. Information display means (for example, display monitor 29 etc.), and the information display means is provided on a substrate for controlling a game (see FIG. 47 etc.) so as not to hinder visibility. It may be done.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the following (11)-(20) is included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, as disclosed in JP-A-2010-201057, a first position and a second position different from the first position are provided so as to be displaceable (movable). It is known to include a movable body, which can be repeatedly displaced (reciprocated) between a first position and a second position. However, in the above-described gaming machine, it is conceivable to provide a position detection means capable of detecting that the movable body is at the first position, and thus the movable body is at the first position. In the case of providing a position detection means capable of detecting the movement of the movable body, if the repetitive displacement with a small amount of displacement is performed in the vicinity of the first position, the movable body does not move within the detection range of the position detection means. Is not detected. In view of this point, there is a demand for a game machine capable of detecting that the movable body has repeatedly displaced even if the movable body is repeatedly displaced in the vicinity of the first position.

(11) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901), which has a first position (for example, a retracted position) and the first position The movable body (for example, the effect body 90300) provided displaceably within a range of different second positions (for example, the first advanced position and the second advanced position), and the movable body is located at the first position Position detecting means (for example, the first photo sensor 90203) for detecting the movement of the movable body, and means for controlling the displacement of the movable body, the repetitive displacement for repeatedly displacing the movable body a plurality of times A displacement control unit capable of performing control (for example, a portion where the CPU for effect control 90120 executes a prophetic effect shown in FIG. 85), the displacement control unit repeating the movable body from the first position Displace When the repetitive displacement control is performed, the movable body is displaced out of the detection area of the position detection means in at least one displacement in the repetitive displacement (for example, as shown in FIG. By performing any of α to effect pattern γ, it is characterized in that the effect body 90300 is moved to the outside of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 at least once.
According to this feature, even when the movable body is repeatedly displaced in the vicinity of the first position, it is possible to detect that the movable body has repeatedly displaced.

(12) In the gaming machine of (11) above,
The displacement control means displaces the movable body into the detection area in at least one displacement in the repetitive displacement control when performing the repetitive displacement control including the displacement from the first position of the movable body. (For example, as shown in FIG. 83, by executing the prognostic effect with any of the effect pattern α to the effect pattern γ, the effect body 90300 is moved out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203. It is characterized in that the effect body 90300 is moved to the detection range of the first photosensor 90203).
According to this feature, since at least one or more displacements are displacements into the detection area, it is possible to perform repetitive displacement with a small amount of displacement.

(13) In the gaming machine of (11) or (12),
The displacement to the outside of the detection area includes the last repetition displacement in a plurality of repetition displacements (for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), a portion performing precursory effects with the effect pattern α)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the end of repetitive displacement of the movable body can be detected.

(14) In the gaming machine of (11),
The displacement out of the detection area includes all repetitive displacements of multiple repetitive displacements,
All repetitive displacements are displacements from a position outside the detection area to a position within the detection area (for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), a portion performing a prognostic effect with the effect pattern β)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is also possible to detect the movable body condition during repetitive displacement.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (14) above,
The displacement out of the detection area includes all repetitive displacements of multiple repetitive displacements,
Repeated displacements other than the first and last repeated displacements are repeated displacements outside the detection area (for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), a portion performing precursory effects with the effect pattern γ)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the start and end of repetitive displacement of the movable body can be detected.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (15),
When displacing the movable body out of the detection area, the displacement control means displaces the movable body until the movable body is no longer detected by the position detection means (for example, the CPU 90120 for effect control uses the sign of FIG. 85). Part that executes S90340 to S90342 in the rendering process)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the movable body can be reliably displaced out of the detection area.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (15),
When displacing the movable body out of the detection area, the displacement control means displaces the movable body by a predetermined displacement amount regardless of whether the movable body is detected by the position detection means. (For example, as shown in the fourth modification, when moving the effect body 90300 out of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 in the admonition effect, whether or not the first photo sensor 90203 detects the effect body 90300 Part that moves the performance object 90300 by a predetermined distance regardless of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is not necessary to control the displacement of the movable body in accordance with whether or not the movable body is detected by the position detection means, the load on the displacement control means can be reduced.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (17),
In the case where the movable body is not displaced out of the detection area in the repetitive displacement control, a notification means capable of informing that the movable body is not displaced out of the detection area is provided (for example, modification 4) As shown in, when moving the directing body 90300 a predetermined distance regardless of whether or not the first photosensor 90203 detects the directing body 90300 in the omen effect, the point at which the moving of the directing body 90300 is finished It is determined whether or not the first photosensor 90203 is turned on, and if the first photosensor 90203 is turned on, the effect body 90300 is still in spite of the end of the movement of the effect body 90300. A part notifying that it is located within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player, the store clerk of the game arcade, or the like can recognize that the movable body has not been displaced out of the detection area.

(19) In the gaming machine of (18),
The notification means does not execute the notification when the movable body is already positioned outside the detection area before the displacement control means executes the repetitive displacement control (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 If S90324 to S90326 are executed in the 85 prognostication processing, and the production pattern of the prognostic production is the production pattern γ, the first photosensor is turned off at the start of the prognostic production, that is, the production body 90300 is the first photosensor 90203 Part that does not execute position error notification even if it is located outside the detection range of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent unnecessary notification execution.

(20) In the gaming machine of (18),
The notification means executes the notification when the movable body is already positioned outside the detection area before the displacement control means executes the repetitive displacement control (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 When S90324 to S90326 are executed in the 85 prognostication processing and the production pattern of the prognostic production is the production pattern α or the production pattern β, the first photo sensor is turned off at the start of the prognostic production, that is, the production body 90300 is 1 Position error notification is executed if it is located outside the detection range of the photo sensor 90203)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player, the store clerk or the like at the game arcade can easily recognize the situation that the movable body is already positioned outside the detection area although the repetitive displacement control is not executed.

  The present invention may have only the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has the configuration other than the invention specific matters together with the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example etc. of the contents of the effect control command. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view exemplifying a game random number counted on the main substrate side. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the movable aspect for every classification of a prize-winning mouth, and the number of balls paid out. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern. It is a figure which illustrates change pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern classification determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a change pattern determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production control pattern, etc. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for presentation control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a judgment result notification command at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening pre-processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting example of an opening control pattern, and the opening setting example of a big winning opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing under big hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of winning a prize mouth judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening post process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of winning balls number related processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of display change processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing under variable display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of waiting processing per special drawing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during a round. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a round post process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end post-process. It is a figure showing an example of production operation in the big hit game state. (A) shows an image display apparatus in which the big hit first specified effect is executed, (B) shows an image display apparatus in which the big hit second specified effect is executed, (C) shows the first odd variable A figure showing an image display with which a specific production was performed, (D) is a figure showing an image display with which a definite variation 2nd special production was performed. (A) shows an image display apparatus in which a first predetermined effect is performed, (B) shows an image display apparatus in which a second predetermined effect is performed, and (C) shows a predetermined effect is performed It is a figure which shows the image display apparatus which is not shown. (A) is a figure which shows the 1st predetermined presentation in which the big hit icon was displayed in parallel, (B) is a figure which shows the 2nd predetermined presentation in which the big hit icon was displayed collectively. It is a figure for demonstrating the alerting | reporting production in a modification 1. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows in detail the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine in the modification 2. FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine in modification 2. (A) in the modification 2 is the front view which simplified the main board | substrate, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration of part of a storage area in a RAM of a main substrate in Modification 2; FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a memory map of a CPU on a main board in a modification 2; FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the main substrate RAM in Modification 2; In the second modification, (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the item displayed on the character ratio display device, and (B-1) to (B-5) explain the change of the display content of the display monitor. FIG. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the movement of data stored in the storage area of the ring buffer in the modification 2; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ratio / duty ratio related process in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a ratio and a duty ratio display control process in the modification 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the counter of the total acquisition ball number in the modification 2, a character acquisition ball number, and a continuous character acquisition ball number. (A)-(D) are the front views which simplified other modification 2 of the main board | substrate. It is the front view which looked at a pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure showing an effect object and an effect unit. It is a rear view which shows the performance object of the state arrange | positioned in the retracted position. It is a rear view which shows the effect body of the state arrange | positioned in a 1st advancing position. It is a rear view which shows the performance object of the state arrange | positioned in a 2nd advancing position. (A) is a schematic view showing the effect body in a state of being disposed at the retracted position, and (B) is a schematic view showing the effect body in a state of being disposed at the first advanced position. (A) is a schematic view showing the effect body in a state of being disposed at the second exit position, and (B) is a schematic view showing the effect body in a state of being disposed at the third exit position. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates a production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a big hit classification determination table, (B) is a figure which shows the content of various big hits. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the output timing of the push button detection signal based on operation of a push button. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production design fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of advance production determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination ratio of the advance production in S90293. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of production for every production pattern of advance production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a omen production determination processing. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the determination ratio of the pro-event effect in S90504, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the determination ratio of the pro-event effect in S90505. It is a timing chart of omen production and notice production in the variable display of the super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement aspect of the movable body in advance production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement aspect of the movable body in a omen effect. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during production design variation. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a sign production processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a movable body retraction | saving process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a movable body retraction | saving process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect of a omen effect. It is an explanatory view showing a production mode of advance production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the retraction | saving aspect of the movable body after preliminary announcement production execution. FIG. 16 is an explanatory view showing an operation example of non-detection operation control, detection operation control and actual operation check operation control in the first modification; FIG. 16 is an explanatory view showing an example of operation speeds of non-detection operation control, detection operation control and actual operation check operation control in the first modification; FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram of a case where a power failure occurs during execution of the advance notice effect in the modification 2; It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement aspect of a movable body in case the pending | holding memory display area in the modification 3 is provided in the lower part of a presentation display apparatus.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, LEDs of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc. The special symbol which is identification information of is displayed variably. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. Do. In addition, the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols, in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in the 7-segment LED are different.

  A plurality of special symbols are given symbol numbers corresponding to them. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special view" .

  The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are both formed, for example, in a square shape. The type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same, or the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display numbers indicating, for example, "00" to "99".

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A in the special figure game and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three, decorative symbols which are plural types of identification information capable of identifying each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged. Then, in response to any one of the change of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the change of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B being started in the special figure game, In the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, variation of the decorative symbols is started. After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special view game, each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R on the "left", "middle" and "right" in the image display device 5 The finalized decorative pattern that is the result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 4A, or the special drawing using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B In synchronization with the game, variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns that can be identified respectively is performed, and a finalized decorative pattern to be a variable display result is derived and displayed. Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means stopping display of identification information such as a decorative symbol and the like, and ending variable display. On the other hand, during the variable display from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed, the change speed of the decorative symbol is "0", and the decorative symbol is displayed. For example, the symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed in a definite manner, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol by the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include, for example, complete stop display of the decorative pattern only for a time shorter than a predetermined time without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed on the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are configured with, for example, eight types of symbols. Corresponding symbol numbers are attached to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are attached to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”. The decorative design is not limited to eight types, and may be any number as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a combination of big hit and a lost combination.

  After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, until the finalized decorative symbol to be the variable display result is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R for "left", "middle" and "right" For example, when the scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers flow sequentially from the top to the bottom from the one with the highest symbol number to the next, and the decorative symbol with the highest symbol number is displayed, the symbol number is subsequently minimized. A certain decorative pattern is displayed. Alternatively, when at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is scrolled from a large symbol number to a small symbol number and a decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number is displayed, Subsequently, a decorative symbol with the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is disposed. In the start winning storage display area 5H, a holding storage display for specifying the number of holdings of variable display corresponding to the special view game is performed. Here, the game ball passes the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A, and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, for suspension of variable display corresponding to the special view game. It occurs based on the starting winnings by doing. That is, although the start condition for executing the variable display game such as the special view game and the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, that the variable display game is being executed based on the start condition established earlier A variable corresponding to the start condition established when the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not established by being controlled to the jackpot gaming state (one of the advantageous states advantageous to the player), etc. The display is suspended.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning a prize storage display area 5H, the first reserve for displaying the number of special view reserve storages in an identifiable manner on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special view hold memories in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The first special view reservation storage number is the number of storages for which the execution of the special view game using the first special view is suspended. The second special view reservation storage count is the number of storages for which the execution of the special view game using the second special view is suspended. The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as the total pending storage number. The term "number of Tokushu reserve storages" simply refers to a concept that includes all of the number of first to reserve special storages, the number of second reserve special storages, and the total number of pending storages, but in particular to some of these There are also cases.

  Under the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The regular winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilting position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric symbol shown in FIG. A tulip type character is provided, and a second start winning opening is formed as a start area different from the first start area.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric character is in the off state, it is difficult for the game ball to easily pass the second starting winning hole It will be open. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric character is on. It becomes easy to expand and open. In addition, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normal opening state, the gaming ball may enter more than in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area changes between the enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes and the normally open state in which the game ball hardly passes or can not pass.

  The game ball which has passed the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. A predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out as winning balls based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first start opening switch 22A, and the first start if the number of the first special view pending storages is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit. The condition is met. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the second start condition is if the second number of pending storages is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit. To establish. The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 22A and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning prize ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 serving as a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2 and a specific area which changes to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a winning opening as.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the OFF state, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball can not pass the big winning mouth . On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball easily passes the big winning mouth Do. As described above, the special winning opening as the specific area is changed into an opened state in which the game ball easily passes, which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass and which is disadvantageous for the player. In place of the closed state in which the game ball can not pass through the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball hardly passes through the big winning opening may be provided.

  The game ball which has passed through the special winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as winning balls. Thus, when the game ball passes through the special winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, for example, when the game ball passes other winning openings such as the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when the special winning prize opening is opened in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, the gaming ball can enter the special winning prize opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning hole is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing the gaming ball through the big winning hole, which is disadvantageous for the player. It becomes 2 states.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. Also, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, the first general winning opening 50A and the second general are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. Two general winning areas of the winning opening 50B are provided.

  The first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B are formed by ball receiving members provided to project (to the player side) in front of the game board surface. The ball receiving member is to receive the game ball flowing down from above from the opening, and the horizontal length (width) of the opening of the ball receiving member is larger than the diameter for one game ball, but the game ball 2 Less than the diameter of the piece. Therefore, two or more gaming balls are not arranged in a row in the horizontal direction to pass through the opening of the ball receiving member. Further, the distance between the ball receiving members provided with the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B is a distance through which at least one or more gaming balls can pass. In addition, winning ball device for switching the opening and closing of the opening of the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B (for example, a role corresponding to the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B for switching the opening and closing of the second start winning opening There is no object, and it is always open. In addition, even if the game ball is won in the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B, both the start condition of the variable display of the special figure game and the start condition of the variable display of the common drawing game based on the winning. Not satisfied.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined number of award balls are given to the player as a specific value based on the fact that the game ball has won the general winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to this. A variable winning ball device, for example, a normal variable winning ball device 6B for performing opening / closing control of the second start winning opening or a special variable for performing opening / closing control of the big winning opening, in association with the game ball having a winning in the winning opening. The fact that the winning ball device 7 is operated to make it easy for the gaming ball to win in the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening may be defined as the specific value given by the winning in the general winning opening.

  Also, the specific value given to the player may be made different according to the general winning opening, and, for example, five winning balls are provided when the gaming ball has won the first general winning opening 50A. However, if the game ball has won in the second general winning opening 50B, ten winning balls may be provided (ie, specific values of different sizes may be provided). In addition, although the specific value awarded when the gaming ball has won in the first general winning opening 50A is a predetermined number of winning balls, when the gaming ball is winning in the second general winning opening 50B, the ordinary variable winning The ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 may be operated (ie, different types of specific values may be given).

  Also, different effects may be executed according to the specific value given according to the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening, for example, according to the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening In such a case that a different effect is executed between the case where is awarded and the case where the variable winning ball device operates according to the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening (ie, when the type of specific value is different) Also good. In addition, in the case where ten winning balls are awarded according to the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening, and in the case where five winning balls are awarded according to the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening Different effects may be performed (ie, when the magnitude of the specific value is different).

  As shown in FIG. 2, the winning of the game balls on the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B is detected by the general winning opening switch 24A corresponding to both. When the game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 24A, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a winning ball.

  In this embodiment, since the winning opening switch 24A corresponding to both of the two first general winning openings 50A and the second general winning opening 50B is provided, in the game control microcomputer 100, a general winning opening is provided. It is possible to detect that the gaming ball has won a prize. It should be noted that, by providing a winning opening switch corresponding to each of the two first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B, in the gaming control microcomputer 100, the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening In addition to the above, it may be possible to detect which general winning opening the game ball has won.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of LEDs of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc. like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and plural kinds of identification information different from the special symbol The symbol is usually displayed variably. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a common game.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The general drawing retention indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general drawing retention memory number as the number of effective passing balls passed through the passing gate 41.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball, and a large number of obstacle nails are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings can be provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number of gaming balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that the gaming ball having entered one of the general winning openings is detected by the predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 3 is provided a striking operation handle which is operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball in accordance with the amount of operation by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch or a touch ring for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming ball paid out as a winning ball and the gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device. A plate is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower tray for retaining the surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A, which can be held by the player and can be tilted, is attached to a member forming the lower tray, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray main body. The stick controller 31A includes an operating rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating rod. The trigger button may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation can be performed by pushing and pulling the predetermined operation finger or the like while the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with the operation hand. Inside the operating rod, a trigger sensor may be incorporated so as to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button.

  A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower tray at the lower part of the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit may be two transmissive photosensors disposed parallel to the board of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod as viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 1; As seen from the player's side, it comprises four transmission type photo sensors which are combined with two transmission type photo sensors disposed vertically to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod. Just do it.

  The member forming the upper tray is provided with, for example, a push button 31B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray main body. The push button 31B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by the player or the like. A push sensor for detecting an operation performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable symbol display of the normal symbol is executed by the normal symbol display 20 such that the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. For example, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is started, for example, that the previous normal drawing game has ended, after the normal drawing start condition for the normal drawing is satisfied, the normal symbol display 20 The popular figure game by is started.

  In this common-play game, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time as the common-pattern fluctuation time has elapsed, the determined normal symbol as the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, if a specific normal symbol such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is “general symbol lost” Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per common figure", the expansion and release control is performed such that the movable wing piece of the electrically-driven tulip that constitutes the normally variable winning ball device 6B is tilted. The normal release control is performed to return to the vertical position when.

  For example, after the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the occurrence of the start winning which is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 2, the gaming ball having passed the first starting winning opening formed in the regular winning ball device 6A. A special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the establishment of the first start condition by the previous special drawing game, the end of the big hit gaming state, or the like. In addition, the second start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the start winning that the game ball which has passed the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, by the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state, the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable display of the special symbol is started after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the variable display of the special symbol Derivate and display the finalized special symbol. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol It becomes ".

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", the game is controlled to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the number "3" or "7" is a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. Each symbol such as a big hit symbol or lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Also, the special symbol common to both of the special figure games may be a big hit symbol or a lost symbol.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit gaming state, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7, predetermined upper limit time The big winning opening is in the open state in the period until the elapse of or the time until the predetermined number of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round for setting the special variable winning prize ball device 7 to a first state advantageous to the player is performed.

  The special winning opening door with the big winning opening opened during execution of the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then the special winning opening is closed, thereby the special variable winning winning ball device 7 is changed to a second state disadvantageous to the player to complete one round. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number. Note that, even before the number of round executions reaches the upper limit number, round execution may be ended when a predetermined condition is met.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state in which the number of round executions is “16” is also referred to as a 16R jackpot state, while the jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds execution is “6” is also referred to as a 6R jackpot state.

  Of the special symbols indicating the number of "3" or "7" that will be the jackpot symbol, the special symbol indicating the number of "7" is the 16R jackpot symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number of "3" is the 6R jackpot symbol . After the special symbol showing the number of "7" which is the 16R big hit symbol as the finalized special symbol in the special figure game is derived, it is controlled to the 16R big hit state. On the other hand, after the special symbol indicating the number of "3" which is the 6R big hit symbol as the determined special symbol in the special figure game is derived, it is controlled to the 6R big hit state.

  In the 16R big hit state based on the fact that the confirmed special symbol as a variable display result in the special figure game has become the 16R big hit symbol, "16" is set relatively high as the upper limit number of rounds when the big winning opening becomes open state Thus, the substantial period in which the big winning opening is open from the start to the end of the jackpot gaming state is relatively long. Therefore, in the 16R big hit state, many game balls are easy to pass through the big winning opening. On the other hand, in the 6R big hit state based on the determined special symbol as the variable display result in the special view game becoming the 6R big hit symbol, the relatively small upper limit number of rounds in which the big winning opening is opened " Since "6" is set, the substantial period in which the big winning opening is in the open state from the start to the end of the big hit gaming state is relatively short. Therefore, in the 6R jackpot state, only game balls smaller than the 16R jackpot state can pass the large winning opening. Thus, in the 16R big hit state, control is performed to change the large winning opening to the first state and the second state in the first change mode in which the game ball easily passes. On the other hand, when in the 6R big hit state, control is performed to change the large winning opening to the first state and the second state in the second change mode in which the game ball hardly passes.

  It is not limited to what makes passing easy of a game ball differ according to the number of times of execution of the round which makes a big prize mouth a 1st state, for example, passage of a game sphere according to the period which makes a big prize mouth a 1st state The ease of operation may be made different. As an example, the special winning opening door of the special variable winning prize ball device 7, the period until the predetermined upper limit time which becomes the first period elapses, or the period until the first number of winning balls occur In the open state, control is performed to change the large winning opening to the open state in the first change mode in which the game ball easily passes. On the other hand, the special winning prize opening door of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is a period until a predetermined upper limit time which is a second period shorter than the first period elapses, or a period until a second number of winning balls are generated. By setting the special winning opening in the open state, control is performed to change the special winning opening to the open state in the second change mode in which the game ball hardly passes.

  A big win in the first big hit state in which the big winning opening is changed in the first change mode in all rounds executed when in the big hit gaming state, and in some rounds executed when the big hit gaming state A second jackpot state may be provided in which the mouth is changed in the second change mode. As an example, although the first big hit state and the second big hit state are both the upper limit number of rounds "16", in the first big hit state in the first change aspect the big winning opening in all of the 16 rounds While changing to the open state, after changing the big winning opening to the open state in the first change mode in 6 rounds of 16 rounds in the second big hit state, the big winning opening in the remaining 10 rounds May be changed to the open state in the second change mode. As described above, when in the first big hit state, control is performed to change the first winning state to the first state and the second state in the first change mode in which the game ball easily passes through the big winning opening, while in the second big hit state At some time, control may be performed to change the first state and the second state in a second change mode in which the game ball hardly passes the special winning opening in a predetermined period.

  For example, like the game in the 16R big hit state, the game in the game state in which a large number of game balls easily pass through the big winning opening is an advantageous game advantageous to the player than the predetermined game in the 6R big hit state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes a predetermined game and an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game, depending on whether the large hit game state is controlled to the 6R big hit state or the 16R big hit state. It is possible.

  In "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in image display device 5, a special figure game using the first special figure in first special symbol display device 4A Among the special drawing games using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B, variable display of the decorative design is started in response to the start of one of the special drawing games. Then, a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when variable display is ended by stop display of the decorative symbol in each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. In this case, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in a predetermined reach state.

  In the reach state, when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination, the display is continuously changed with respect to the decorative pattern not being stopped and displayed yet It is a display state in which the state, or all or part of the decorative pattern changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of "left", "middle" and "right", when the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined big hit combination are stopped and displayed, they are still displayed. In the remaining decorative symbol display area which is not stopped and displayed, the display condition in which the decorative symbol is changing, or in all or part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right" It is a display state in which the decorative design is fluctuating synchronously while constituting all or part of the big hit combination.

  In response to the reaching state, the variation speed of the decorative pattern is reduced, a character image different from the decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display 5, and the display mode of the background image is changed. By rendering and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern or changing the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, a rendering operation different from that before reaching the reach state may be executed. A rendering operation such as a character image display, a change in the display mode of the background image, a reproduction display of a moving image, or a rendering operation such as a change in the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, or a combination of some or all of them It is called reach effect indication. In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the voice output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. An operation mode different from the above may be included.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns having different operation modes may be prepared in advance. And each reach mode differs in the possibility of becoming a "big hit". That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be made different depending on which of the plurality of reach effects is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as an example, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are set in advance. Then, when the reach mode of the super reach such as the super reach α or the super reach β appears, the possibility that the variable display result is the “big hit” is higher than when the reach mode of the normal reach appears.

  Unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may reach the reach state during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the variable display result may become the "big hit", etc. A variable display effect may be executed to notify the player by the variable display mode of the decorative symbol or the like. In the present embodiment, variable display effects such as “slip” and “simulated link” can be performed. It may be determined whether or not to execute the variable display effect of “slip” or “simulated link” in response to the change pattern being determined on the main substrate 11 side. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is to be executed on the effect control substrate 12 side may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the main substrate 11 side.

  Unlike variable display effects such as reach effect or “slip” or “simulated link” during variable display of decorative symbols, for example, displaying a predetermined effect image, image display or voice output as a message, lamp There is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol may reach the reach state by the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative symbol such as lighting, and the reach effect by the super reach may be executed. An advance notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that the variable display result may be a "big hit" or the like. The production operation to be the preview production is the variable display state of the decorative design after the variable display of the decorative design is started in all of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" It is sufficient if it is executed before the reach state. In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may become a "big hit" may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special drawing game, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol does not reach the predetermined state after the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started. The fixed decoration pattern which becomes non reach combination of may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative symbol is referred to as a "non-reach" variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

  When the special symbol to be the lost symbol is displayed as a stop as a final symbol in the special figure game, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started after the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, after the reach effect is performed, or the reach effect is not performed, the finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined reach loss combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative symbol is referred to as a "reach" variable display mode in the case where the variable display result is "loss".

  When the special symbol to be the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the special figure game, the predetermined reach effect is executed corresponding to the change display state of the decorative symbol becoming the reach state. After that, or the reach effect is not performed, the finalized decorative symbol which is a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for the finalized decorative pattern to be a big hit combination, for example, the symbol numbers variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5 are “ Among the decorative symbols 1 ”to“ 8 ”, any one of the decorative symbols having the same symbol number is“ left ”,“ middle ”, and“ right ”in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. What is necessary is just the one displayed on the predetermined effective line and displayed in a stopped state.

  Depending on whether the special symbol derived as the finalized special symbol is the 16R big hit symbol or the 6R big hit symbol, the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed as the big hit combination may be made different. As an example, when the 16R big hit symbol is derived as the finalized special symbol, the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the big hit combination is selected for all of the decorative symbols of "1" to "8", while the 6R big hit is selected. When the symbol is derived as the finalized special symbol, the decorative symbol to be displayed in the big hit combination is selected for the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are even "2", "4", "6" and "8" May be In this case, it is notified that the 16R big hit state will be reached by stopping display of any of the decorative symbols with odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” in the big hit combination Be done. On the other hand, when any of the decorative symbols with symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” is stopped and displayed in the big hit combination, whether it will be 16R big hit state or 6R big hit state The player becomes unrecognizable or difficult to recognize.

  In response to the determined special symbol in the special figure game becoming the 6R big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the decoration pattern of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed The variable display mode of the symbol is referred to as the "first jackpot" variable display mode. On the other hand, in response to the finalized special symbol in the special figure game becoming the 16R big hit symbol, the fixed ornament symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed. The variable display mode of the decorative symbol is called the "second jackpot" variable display mode. Also, the big hit gaming state controlled after the variable display mode of the first big hit is displayed is referred to as the first big hit gaming state, and the big hit gaming state controlled after the variable display mode of the second big hit is displayed is , Referred to as the second jackpot gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, after the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" is controlled to the probability changing state in which probability change control is performed. The probability change control is the probability that the special display game and the variable display result of the decorative symbol become a "big hit" (probability of being controlled to the big hit gaming state) from the normal state (also referred to as normal gaming state, low probability low base state) Is also a control to improve. That is, by performing the probability change control, the probability that the variable display result is a "big hit" is enhanced in the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbol than in the normal state, and the probability of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is high. Become. The normal state is a gaming state (a gaming state in which the same control as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed) different from the specific gaming state such as the big hit gaming state, the definite change state, and the time saving state. The time saving state is a gaming state in which high open control (described later) and time saving control (described later) are performed. Hereinafter, the gaming state in which at least one of the high opening control and the time saving control is performed is referred to as a time saving state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the big hit gaming state ends, both the high opening control and the time saving control are performed in a short time state. The high opening control is control for improving the frequency at which the normal winning ball device 6A is in the enlarged open state more than the normal state. That is, by performing the high opening control, the frequency with which the normal winning ball device 6A is in the enlarged open state is increased than in the normal state, and the possibility that the second start condition is satisfied is increased. Specifically, for example, in high open control, control to shorten the variation time of the regular symbol in the regular game with the regular symbol display 20 than in the normal state, and the variable display result of the regular symbol in each regular game Control to improve the probability of being hit "flat" more than in the normal state, tilting to perform tilting control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result becomes "on flat" One of the control for making the control time longer than in the normal state and the control for increasing the number of tilting times more than in the normal state may be performed, or two or more of the controls may be It may be performed. In addition, time saving control is control for shortening the variation time of the special symbol in the special figure game compared to the normal state. That is, by performing the time saving control, the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the special figure game becomes shorter than that in the normal state, and the time until the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived and displayed becomes faster. When both the high opening control and the time saving control are performed together, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established. Since the variation time of the special drawing game using the second special drawing is shortened, the number of game balls which is reduced until the next variable display result becomes "big hit" and the next variable display result becomes "big hit" It can save (compress, reduce) the time required to

  That is, in the present embodiment, after the big hit gaming state ends, it is controlled to be a probability change state and is controlled to be a time saving state. In other words, after the big hit gaming state ends, time saving control and high open control are performed along with the probability change control.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation state in which the probability variation control is performed, one of the condition that the special view game is executed a predetermined number of times and the variable display result becomes “big hit” again first. It ends when it is established. However, if the variable display result is "big hit" again, as described above, after the big hit gaming state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state again.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the short time state in which both the high release control and the time saving control are performed simultaneously ends when the probability change control ends. That is, the high release control and the time saving control end with the probability change control.

  In addition, the gaming state which is both a definite change state and a short time state is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The gaming state which is a definite change state and not a short time state is also referred to as a high probability low base state. The gaming state which is a short time state and not a definite change state is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The gaming state which is neither time saving nor definite changing state is also referred to as a low probability low base state (normal state). When the gaming state is a high probability high base state or a high probability low base state, the probability of the variable display result being a "big hit" corresponding to each special view game is higher than usual, so the low probability low base state It becomes easy to become a big hit game state compared with (normal state). In addition, when the gaming state is high probability high base condition or low probability high base condition, the special figure fluctuation time in each special figure game is shortened and the second start condition is easily established, the low probability low base It becomes easy to be a big hit gaming state compared with the state (normal state). Thus, the high probability high base state, the high probability low base state, and the low probability high base state are advantageous states for the player. Also, although the gaming state in which at least one of the high opening control and the time saving control is performed is referred to as the time saving state, the gaming state in which only one of the high opening control or the time saving control is performed Also included. Also, the definite change state (high probability high base state, high probability low base state) is also referred to as a special game state. In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in either the low probability low base state or the high probability high base state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the high release control and the time saving control are described as ending with the probability change control, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the high release control (as well as the time reduction control) may end after (late) the probability change control ends or (early) before the probability change control ends. For example, in the case of a definite change state, one of the predetermined figure (for example, 100 times) special figure game being executed and the variable display result becoming "big hit" again is established first. In the high opening control (same time saving control as well), the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 times) more than the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the probability variation control Alternatively, the variable display result may be terminated when any one of the conditions that the result of the variable display becomes “big hit” is satisfied first, and may be more than the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the probability change control. The special figure game is executed a small predetermined number of times (for example, 80 times), and the variable display result becomes “big hit” again, and any one of the conditions is ended when it is established first. It is also good. In addition, for example, the predetermined number of times related to the probability change control after the big hit gaming state is ended according to the type of the big hit symbol etc, the predetermined number of times related to high opening control, the predetermined number of times related to time saving control may be determined . That is, for example, after the big hit game state with a big hit symbol is ended, the high opening control or the time reduction control ends with the probability change control, and after the big hit game state with another big hit symbol is ended, the high open control or time short control May end after (or before) the probability change control. The high release control does not have to end with the time saving control. That is, the high release control may end after the time reduction control ends or before the time reduction control ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability change control after the big hit gaming state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the jackpot gaming state ends, one or two of the probability change control, the time saving control, and the high opening control may be performed. For example, depending on the type of jackpot symbol etc., it may be determined whether to perform the probability change control after the jackpot gaming state is over, whether to perform the high opening control, or whether to execute the time saving control.

  Although the jackpot gaming state, the high probability high base state, the high probability low base state, and the low probability high base state are described as advantageous states for the player, advantageous states for the player are limited thereto. I will not. For example, in the present embodiment, in the case of providing a sudden (sudden definite) change, a small hit, etc., a positive, a small hit, etc. is also included in the advantageous state advantageous to the player.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13 and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 or the like for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board 2 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board comprising a function for setting random numbers used in the special view game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and the effect control board 12 or the like. It has a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, main board 11 controls the variable display of the 1st special figure and the 2nd special figure by performing lighting / extinguishing control of each LED etc which form 1st special symbol display 4A and 2nd special symbol display 4B. It also has a function to control the variable display of a predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 etc. ing.

  The main circuit board 11 includes, for example, a microcomputer 100 for game control, a switch circuit 110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 100 for game control, and the microcomputer 100 for game control A solenoid circuit 111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. And various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electric parts for presentation such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 produces effects such as all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L, 8R, all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9 etc. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for the purpose to execute a predetermined rendering operation.

  The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control provided separately from the effect control board 12 and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output voice based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12 and the like. The processing circuit etc. which perform the audio | voice signal processing for this are mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9 or the like is turned on / off. A lamp driver circuit or the like for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected to a wire for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the general winning port switch 24A. It is done. The gate switch 21, the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor called, for example. It is sufficient if it has. In addition, the main substrate 11 has a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold indicator 25A, a second hold indicator 25B, and a common view hold indicator 25C. The wiring which transmits the command signal for performing display control of etc. is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control an audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 And a lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE, and the second byte indicates EXT. The first bit of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and another command may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. "H" of "8001H" indicates that "8001" is a hexadecimal number. The same applies to other commands. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is an ornament that is variably displayed in each of "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. It is a fluctuation pattern specification command which specifies a fluctuation pattern such as a symbol. The “XX” of the EXT data in the “81XXH” indicates that the value is an unspecified value, and is a value arbitrarily set according to the content of the command. For example, in the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the fluctuation pattern or the like designated in the fluctuation pattern designation command. The same applies to "XX" of EXT data in other commands.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”, or the variable display result is “big hit”. Different EXT data are set in accordance with the determination result as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be made. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a result of the prior determination that the variable display result is "loss". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type “first big hit” and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type "second big hit" and the big hit type determination result.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination designating command for designating the stop of the variation of the decorative symbol in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a prize determination result specifying command for designating a predetermined determination result at the time of occurrence of the start winning, such as the first starting winning or the second starting winning. In this embodiment, a predetermined random number extracted at the occurrence of the start winning is determined to be included in a plurality of preset numerical ranges, and different data are designated according to the determination result based on the determination result. Set as EXT data of command.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designating command for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening for notifying that it is a period in which the special winning opening has changed from the opening state to the closing state in the big hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the large winning opening open notification command and the large winning opening open notification command, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the 6R big hit state or the 16R big hit state.

  The command B0XXH is a gaming state designating command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command B000H is a first gaming state specification command corresponding to the low probability low base state, the command B001H is a second gaming state specification command corresponding to the low probability high base state, and the command B002H is high probability low The third game state specification command corresponding to the base state is set, and the command B 003H is set as the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the high probability high base state. In the present embodiment, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the game state of either the low probability low base state or the high probability high base state, the second gaming state specification corresponding to the low probability high base state is specified. The command or the third game state specification command corresponding to the high probability low base state is not used.

  The command B1XXH is a probability variation end designation command for designating a termination of probability variation when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shifts from a high probability high base state to a low probability low base state without becoming a big hit. When the gaming state is shifted from the high certainty high base state (certain change state) to the low certainty low base state without becoming a big hit and the definite change is finished, the big hit serialization ends. For this reason, it becomes an end condition of continuous change that the gaming state is shifted from the high certainty high base state (probability change state) to the low certainty low base state without becoming a big hit and the probability change is ended. A definite change end specification command is set when a continuous change end condition is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserve storage number notification command for notifying the first special view retention storage number in order to display the special view retention storage number in an identifiable manner in the start winning storage display area 5H or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserve storage number notification command for notifying the second special view reserve storage number in order to display the special view reserve storage number in an identifiable manner in the start winning storage display area 5H or the like.

  The command D0XXH is a large winning opening winning notification command for notifying that there has been a game ball winning to the large winning opening. The special winning opening winning notification command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12, for example, when the gaming ball passes the special winning opening.

  The command D1XXH is a general winning opening winning notification command for notifying that there has been a game ball winning to the general winning opening. The general winning a prize opening winning notice command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, when the game ball passes the general winning a prize opening.

  In the present embodiment, the first hold storage number notification command is based on, for example, that the first start condition is satisfied when the first start winning is generated by the game ball passing the first start winning opening. The main substrate 11 is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 as a notification of an increase in the number of first special image reservations. The second reserve memory number notification command is based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, when the second start winning occurs due to the game ball passing through the second start winning opening, the second special view hold It is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 as a notification of an increase in the number of memories.

  In addition to transmitting the first pending storage count notification command as notification of an increase in the first special view storage limit, it may also be sent as a notification of a decrease in the first special view storage limit. Good. That is, even though the first reserved storage number notification command is transmitted on the basis of the fact that the first special view storage number is reduced based on the establishment of the first start condition in addition to the first startup condition. Good. Also, in addition to transmitting the second pending storage number notification command as notification of an increase in the second special view pending storage number, transmission may be performed as a notification of a decrease in the second special view pending storage number. Good. That is, on the basis of the fact that the second start condition storage condition is notified based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied in addition to the second start condition, the second hold storage number notification command may be transmitted. Good.

  Note that a second pending storage number notification command is transmitted in addition to the first pending storage number notification command based on the establishment of the first startup condition, and the second pending storage number is transmitted based on the establishment of the second startup condition. In addition to the notification command, a first pending storage count notification command may be transmitted. That is, on the basis of the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the first number of pending storages is notified as an increase in the number of first special views holding storages or the number of second special views pending storages. Both the notification command and the second pending storage number notification command may be transmitted. Similarly, the first pending storage is notified as a notification of a decrease in the first special view pending storage number or the second special view pending storage number based on the establishment of either the first start condition or the second start condition. Both the number notification command and the second pending storage number notification command may be transmitted.

  In addition, instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, or in addition to the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, the total for reporting the total pending storage number A pending storage count notification command may be sent. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase or decrease in the total pending storage number. When the total pending storage number notification command is transmitted instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, which of the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (the (1) A start opening winning combination designation command may be transmitted which specifies which of the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening has a start winning combination). The establishment of the first start condition and the establishment of the second start condition are designated by the above-mentioned first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command.

  In the present embodiment, in the start winning determination process, it is determined in which numerical range the random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result extracted based on the occurrence of the start winning is included. Then, a value for designating the determination result of the random number MR1 is set in the EXT data of the prize determination result designating command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 can recognize whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" based on the EXT data of the winning determination result specification command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM 101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data, etc., and a RAM 102 for providing a work area for game control A CPU 103 for executing a control operation by executing a program for game control, a random number circuit 104 for updating numerical data independently indicating a random number, and an I / O 105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103 Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, variation Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 for pattern determination and the random number value MR5 for common result display result determination is controlled to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating a part or all of the random numbers MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 updates the various numerical value data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the MR 5 may be counted.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not the variable display result such as the special symbol in the special figure game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit". It takes a value in the range of "0" to "65535". The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "first jackpot" or "second jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit", For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "99".

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol, to any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. ~ Take a value in the range of "251". The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, “0” to “0 Take a value in the range of 997 ". The random number value MR5 for determining the common drawing display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the common drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per common drawing” or “general drawing loss”, etc. Is a random number value, for example, a value in the range of "3" to "13".

  FIG. 5 is a view showing the relationship between the movable mode and the number of balls paid out for each type of winning opening. The first starting winning opening (normal winning ball device 6A) is a starting area which is always kept in a constant open state, and is a so-called fixed winning opening. The second starting winning opening (normally variable winning ball device 6B) is a so-called movable winning opening that is changed by the solenoid 81 to a normal open state where it is in the vertical position and an enlarged open state where it is in the tilting position. The general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A and second general winning opening 50B) is a fixed winning opening similar to the first start winning opening (normal winning ball device 6A). The special winning opening (special variable winning ball device 7) is a so-called movable winning opening in which the special winning opening door is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. The first start winning opening (normal winning ball device 6A) and the general winning opening (first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B) are fixed winning openings, and the winning percentage of the game ball regardless of the state Is almost constant. The second start winning opening (normal variable winning ball device 6B) and the large winning hole (special variable winning ball device 7) are movable winning openings, and the winning percentage of the game ball changes greatly depending on the open / close state. ing.

  The number of game balls to be paid out when the game ball has won in the first starting winning opening (normally winning ball device 6A) is three. The number of gaming balls to be paid out when the gaming ball has won in the second starting winning opening (normally variable winning ball device 6B) is three. The number of game balls to be paid out when the game ball has won in the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B) is six. The number of game balls to be paid out when the game ball has won in the special winning opening (special variable winning ball device 7) is 15. Therefore, when the game ball has won in the first start winning opening (normal winning ball device 6A) or the second starting winning hole (normal variable winning ball device 6B), or the general winning hole (first general winning hole 50A and the first) 2 Even with the general winning opening 50B), too many game balls are not paid out. On the other hand, many game balls are paid out by the game balls winning in the special winning opening (special variable winning ball device 7).

  FIG. 6 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "variable" corresponding to each of the cases where it is "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the result is a "big hit" or the like. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "losing" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern, and the variable display result is "losing" and the decorative symbol is The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern.

  The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α or super reach β is executed.

  FIG. 7 shows the variation pattern types in the present embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 6 is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. 7. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include a single or a plurality of variation patterns classified based on, for example, the mode of the rendering operation performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  As an example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are classified according to the reach effect type, and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display state of the decorative design does not reach a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with normal reach , And a variation pattern type including a variation pattern involving super reach. Moreover, about the fluctuation pattern with super reach, according to the content of reach production, you may make it classify | categorize into a different fluctuation pattern classification. Alternatively, different fluctuation pattern types may be classified according to whether or not a predetermined variable display effect is performed. As another example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be classified according to the variable display time of the decorative pattern or the like. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 7, one or more fluctuation patterns are classified into each fluctuation pattern type according to the contents of the variable display mode and the variable display. The specific classification of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 6 can be specified, for example, from the setting of the fluctuation pattern determination table 133 as shown in FIG. That is, in the fluctuation pattern determination table 133, the fluctuation patterns to which the determination value is assigned according to each fluctuation pattern type are classified so as to be included in the fluctuation pattern type.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 of the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data, table data, etc. used to control the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Also, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a plurality of variation patterns as shown in FIG. The table data etc. which comprise the fluctuation pattern table are stored.

  FIG. 8 shows a configuration example of the special view display result determination table 130 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 130 is variable in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit" before the finalized special symbol to be the display result is derived and displayed. Is a table to be referenced.

  In the special view display result determination table 130, a gaming state in which probability change control is not performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a low probability low base state or a low probability high base state. In this embodiment, the low probability high base state is not obtained. A game state (for example, a high probability low base state or a high probability high base state) in which a probability change control is performed or a high probability high base state is not achieved in this embodiment. In accordance with the presence or absence of the probability variation control as to whether or not, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "losing". In the special figure display result determination table 130, table data indicating decision values assigned to a plurality of types of special figure display results is determined based on whether the special figure display result is controlled to a big hit gaming state as a "big hit". It is the corresponding data for decision.

  In the setting example of the special view display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 8, in the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed (“with probability change control” in FIG. 7), the gaming state in which the probability change control is not performed is More decision values are assigned to the "big hit" special view display results than "without probability variation control". As a result, when in the definite variation state, the probability that the special view display result is determined to be a "big hit" is higher than when not in the definite variation state.

  In this embodiment, whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Instead, the special view display result is determined with reference to the same table data in the special view display result determination table 130. On the other hand, depending on whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The special-pattern display result may be determined with reference to each table data in which assignment of the determination value to the predetermined special-image display result is made different. Thereby, in the case of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, and in the case of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the special figure The determination ratio of the display result can be made different.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the big hit type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type to any one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the special figure display result to the jackpot gaming state Is a table to be referenced. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the special symbol for which variable display is performed in the special figure game is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination depending on whether the special symbol is the first special figure or the second special figure. A numerical value is assigned to a big hit type such as "first big hit" or "second big hit". As shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot type determination table 131 sets table data for setting the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 to a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type. May be included.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9, the big hit type of “first big hit” or “second big hit” depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of the decision value to is different. Thereby, the case of determining the jackpot type to any one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special drawing game using the first special drawing by the first special symbol display device 4A. In the case of determining the jackpot type to any one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special drawing game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, The ratio of determining the jackpot type as "first jackpot" or "second jackpot" can be made different.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, two types of table data in which assignment of determination values to a plurality of types of big hit types is different are prepared, and it is a special drawing game using the first special drawing, or the second special drawing The jackpot type is determined with reference to any of the two types of table data depending on whether the game is a special-figure game using a game, but the method of determining the jackpot type is not limited to this. For example, whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure, or a special figure game using the second special figure, in which one kind of table data having the same assignment of determination values to a plurality of big hit types is prepared. Regardless of the above, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to the same table data.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of the fluctuation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 10A and a lost variation pattern type determination table (normal) 132B shown in FIG. 10B as variation pattern type determination tables. A lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (during time saving control) 132C shown in (C) is prepared in advance.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A is based on the random pattern value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern type determination according to the judgment result of the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit". Is a table referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is "first big hit" or "second big hit". , Fluctuation pattern type CA3-1 to fluctuation pattern type CA3-3 is allocated. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A, the determination value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each fluctuation pattern type is different depending on which of plural types the jackpot type is determined. There is a part. For example, allocation of decision values to variation pattern types CA3-1 to variation pattern types 3-3 is different between the case where the big hit type is "first big hit" and the case where it is "second big hit". As a result, it is possible to make the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type different according to the determination result as to which of the plural types the jackpot type is to be made.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10A, each variation pattern type is determined also when the big hit type is “first big hit” and also when it is “second big hit”. Although it is obtained, a certain variation pattern type may be determined only if it is a specific jackpot type. That is, the variation pattern type to which the determination value is assigned may be provided to either "first big hit" or "second big hit". Thereby, when it is determined that a certain jackpot type, it is possible to determine a variation pattern type different from the case where it is determined to another jackpot type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern type is made to differ depending on the big hit type, but the determination ratio of the variation pattern type is not limited to this. For example, the determination ratio of the variation pattern type may be made different depending on the jackpot type and the gaming state. Further, regardless of the jackpot type, the determination ratio of the variation pattern type may be made different according to the game state. Further, the variation pattern type may be determined by a common determination ratio not related to the jackpot type or the gaming state.

  The lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B and the lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (during time reduction control) 132C are the fluctuation pattern types when it is determined that the special figure display result is "lost". It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR3 for type determination. Here, the lost variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B, for example, the gaming state is a low probability low base state or a low probability high base state (in this embodiment, the low probability high base state is not obtained, so the low probability low base It is selected as a use table when it is in the state). On the other hand, the lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (during time reduction control) 132C is, for example, high probability since the gaming state is not high probability low base state or high probability high base state (in this embodiment, high probability low base state). It is selected as a use table when it is in the high base state).

  In the lost variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B and the lost variation pattern type determination table (during time reduction control) 132C, the determination value is assigned to the type of the variation pattern type to which it is assigned, or to the same variation pattern type There are different numbers of decision values. Thereby, when it is in a certain gaming state, it is possible to determine a variation pattern type different from that in the other gaming state. In addition, it is possible to decide fluctuation pattern classification with the decision ratio which responds to game state.

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of the fluctuation pattern determination table 133 stored in the ROM 101. The fluctuation pattern determination table 133 is a table referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern as any one of a plurality of types based on the random pattern value MR4 for fluctuation pattern determination according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern type. In the fluctuation pattern determination table 133, numerical values to be compared with the random value MR4 for fluctuation pattern determination are allocated to one or more fluctuation patterns according to the fluctuation pattern type.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period. In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means and data indicating the number of unpaid award balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power failure or the like is recovered after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 12, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 12 includes a first special view reserve storage unit 151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 151B, a common drawing reserve storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special view reserve storage unit 151A stores the reserve data of the special view game which has started but has not been started although the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening formed by the normal prize ball device 6A. . As an example, first special view reserve storage unit 151A is associated with the reserve number in the order of winning on the first start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the first start condition in the passage of the game ball from random number circuit 104 etc. The upper limit value of the number of memories is a predetermined upper limit value with numerical data etc. indicating the extracted random number value MR1 for determination of special view display result, random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination Remember until you reach. The reserve data thus stored in the first special view reserve storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special view game using the first special view is suspended, and a predetermined display is made based on the variable display result in the special view game. It becomes holding storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a game value is awarded.

  The second special view reserve storage unit 151B stores the reserve data of the special view game which has not yet started although the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B and the start winning occurs. Do. As an example, second special view reserve storage unit 151B is associated with the reserve number in order of winning on the second start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second start condition at the passage of the game ball from random number circuit 104 etc. The number is a predetermined upper limit value, with numerical data etc. indicating the extracted random number value MR1 for special view display result determination, random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination as reserved data. I will remember until it reaches. The reserve data thus stored in the second special view reserve storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special view game using the second special view is suspended, and a predetermined display is made based on the variable display result in the special view game. It becomes holding storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a game value is awarded.

  The common drawing reservation storage unit 151C stores holding information of the common drawing game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display unit 20 even though the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 151C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order that the gaming ball passed the passing gate 41 The numerical value data etc. which show the random number value MR5 for 1st are stored as hold data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for causing the CPU 103 to update a part or all of the game random numbers by software.

  For example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR5 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, and each randomness periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numeric data representing numbers is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 includes an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with a CPU for effect control 120 which performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area for the CPU 120 for effect control. RAM 122, the display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, etc., and the effect control CPU 120 independently perform random number data updating indicating numerical value indicating random number values. A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, the effect control board 12 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120 to execute a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121, a change data write operation in which the effect control CPU 120 writes various change data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 in the RAM 122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive various signal input from outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, the effect control CPU 120 to I / O for effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 includes wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13. Wiring or the like for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 14 is connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts up numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the effect operation. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used to control the rendering operation, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, in the ROM 121, there are a plurality of determination tables prepared to make various determinations, determinations, and settings by the effect control CPU 120, table data constituting the determination tables, pattern data forming the various effect control patterns, etc. It is memorized.

  As an example, the ROM 121 stores a rendering control pattern table storing a plurality of types of rendering control patterns used by the rendering control CPU 120 to control rendering operations by various rendering devices. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special pattern change effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns may be stored.

  The special figure fluctuation time effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns, in the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the time when the definite special symbol as the special figure display result is derived and displayed It is composed of data indicating control content of various rendering operations such as variable display operation of decorative symbols and reach display operation in reach effect, or various effect display operations without variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect control pattern is composed of data etc. indicating the control content of the effect operation to be the notice effect to be executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control content.

  FIG. 13A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. Each effect control pattern, such as a special figure fluctuation effect control pattern and various effect control patterns, includes, for example, a effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, end code, It comprises control data for controlling various rendering operations, and the contents of the various rendering control, the switching timing of the rendering control, etc. may be set in time series. In addition to the above, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data or the like for specifying the content of operation control in the movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value to be compared with the stored value (effect control process timer value) of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control board 12, and The determination value corresponding to the execution period of each rendering operation is preset. Note that, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect may be received as a predetermined effect control command from the main substrate 11 or a predetermined process may be executed as a process for controlling an effect operation in the effect control substrate 12 Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control may be set according to the predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes, for example, data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data for specifying the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating an audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating an output mode such as a sound effect interlocked with a variable display operation of an ornamental pattern during variable display of an ornamental pattern. There is. That is, the audio control data is data for specifying an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for specifying the lighting operation of the light emitter. The operation detection control data includes, for example, a period in which an operation on an operation unit such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is effectively detected, and data indicating control content of a rendering operation in the case where the operation is effectively detected. That is, the operation detection control data is data for specifying a rendering operation according to the operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all of the effect control patterns, but are effect control patterns configured to include a part of control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 13B is a diagram for describing various effect operations performed in accordance with the content of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode designated by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination values, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, control is made to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is made to blink a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 or decorative LED in a mode specified by the lamp control data. Control is performed to accept the operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in the operation valid period specified by the operation detection control data, and to determine the content of the effect. In addition, dummy data may be set to data corresponding to a component for effect that is not to be controlled even though it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

  Although the rendering operation shown in FIG. 13B corresponds to the entire period from the start of variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop, the present invention is not limited thereto, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol An effect control pattern may be provided to execute an effect operation corresponding to a partial period. Alternatively, an effect control pattern may be provided to execute an effect operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than during variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern based on, for example, the fluctuation pattern or the like indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, when starting variable display of the decorative pattern, for example. Further, the CPU 120 for effect control sets a corresponding effect control pattern, for example, when starting the execution of effects such as a notice effect or a jackpot effect. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern may be configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. Thereafter, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values match, and if it matches, the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data Control the As described above, the effect control CPU 120 advances the control of the effect device in accordance with the contents of the process data # 1 to the process data #n included in the effect control pattern. In each of the process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n associated with the effect control process timer determination value # 1 to effect control process timer determination value #n, voice control Data # 1 to voice control data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control contents of the rendering operation in the rendering device, and the rendering control The presentation control execution data # 1 to the presentation control execution data #n for specifying the execution of are configured.

  The instruction according to the effect control pattern set in this manner is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads image data indicated by the instruction from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores the image data in the VRAM. Further, in the voice control board 13 or the like that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated in the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. Let

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 14A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

  For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. The counters provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 include, for example, a special winning opening winning number counter, a current winning ball number display counter, a cumulative winning ball number display counter, a first big hit continuous counting counter, a second big hit continuous run There is a counter of the number of times. In addition, each count value of the special winning opening winning number counter, the current winning ball number display counter, and the cumulative winning ball number displaying counter are the special winning opening winning number counting value, the current winning ball number displaying count value, and the cumulative winning ball number display, respectively. It is stored in a predetermined area as a count value, a first jackpot number of times count value, and a second jackpot number of times count value. In addition, when the big hit consecutive house occurs, as the count value of the current prize ball number indication counter, the past prize sphere number indication count value for the past 50 times is stored. As the past prize ball number display count value, the 1st previous prize ball number display count value to 50 times the previous prize ball number display count value is stored. The number of consecutive hits of the first jackpot is stored as the first consecutive count count value, and the number of consecutive hits of the second jackpot is stored as the second consecutive count count value. Further, in the effect control counter setting unit 193, a big hit type (first big hit or second big hit) corresponding to the past prize ball count count value is stored together with the past prize ball count display count value. In addition, the jackpot of a big hit means that a big hit occurs in multiple times until the carriage end condition occurs. Although the end condition of consecutive loin can be set appropriately, in this embodiment, it can be set to end the probability variation gaming state without shifting to the big hit gaming state. The number of consecutive villas in the consecutive villas is judged based on the first big hit consecutive villa count count value and the second large hit consecutive villa count count value, and the first big hit consecutive villa count count value and the second big hit consecutive villa count count value The number to which is added is the number of consecutive villas during the consecutive villas. Alternatively, the first jackpot frequency counter and the second jackpot frequency counter may be combined to provide a roller speed counter.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 14 (B1) and the second start winning command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 14 (B2) is the effect control buffer setting unit 194. Are stored in a predetermined area of The first start winning command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the number of first special image storage blocks. A storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the second special drawing reserve storage number is provided in the second start winning command buffer 194B.

  When there is a start winning to the first start winning opening, a plurality of commands such as a first hold storage number notification command and a winning determination result designation command become one set, and are transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 . When there is a start winning to the second start winning opening, a plurality of commands such as a second hold storage number notification command and a winning judgment result specification command become one set, and are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . A storage area is secured in the first start winning command buffer 194A so that one set of commands transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first start winning can be stored in association with each other. A storage area is secured in the second start winning command buffer 194 B so that one set of commands transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second start winning can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the command received at the start winning combination in the free space of the first start winning command buffer 194A or the second start winning command buffer 194B according to the reception order. For example, the first hold storage number notification command at the top of the free space in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4” of the first start winning command buffer 194A based on the first start winning, the winning judgment result Store in the order of specified commands. On the other hand, when the second pending storage number notification command based on the second start winning and the winning judgment determination result designation command are received, storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4" of the second start winning command buffer 194B. The second hold storage number notification command and the winning judgment result specification command are stored at the top of the free space in the order of the second hold storage number notification command.

  When the first start winning combination and the second start winning combination occur, command transmission is performed in the order of the pending storage number notification command and the winning determination result specifying command. Therefore, if command reception is normally performed, the pending storage number notification command and the winning time are stored in the storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4” as shown in FIGS. 14 (B1) and (B2). It will be stored in order of the judgment result specification command. In FIG. 14 (B1), commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” and “2”, and in FIG. 14 (B2), storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “3” Command is stored.

  The commands stored in the first start winning command buffer 194A and the second start winning command buffer 194B are deleted from those stored in the first storage area each time variable display of decorative symbols is started. And the subsequent memory contents are shifted. For example, when variable display of a new decorative symbol is started corresponding to the start of a special drawing game using the first special drawing in the storage state shown in FIG. 14 (B1), it is stored in buffer number "1". Command is deleted, and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number “2” is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number “1”, and buffer number “3” or “4” Each command stored in the area corresponding to each is shifted to the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “2” and “3”.

  For the area corresponding to buffer number "3" in second start winning command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 14 (B2), the second special view pending storage number notified by the second pending storage count notification command is " An example is shown in the case where a mismatch occurs due to "1". That is, the buffer number has a larger value than the second special view pending storage number notified by the second pending storage number notification command, and the second special view pending storage number notified from the main board 11 is (2) It is inconsistent with the number of second special view pending storages specified from the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 194B. In addition, since the shift of each command is performed when the variable display of the decorative design is started, it is immediately contradictory even if the buffer number becomes a value smaller than the number of special view pending storage notified by the pending storage number notification command. It must not be. However, differences at the time of reception of a command can be contradictory.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC incorporated in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be entered after executing the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step S13).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main substrate 11 side by software is executed (step S14). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, a normal symbol process processing is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation of the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process processing, and enables variable display of the normal symbol and tilting operation setting of the movable wing in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, etc. Do.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, effect control After control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the substrate 12, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the switch to the off state, etc., transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process process executed in step S15 shown in FIG. In the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 17, the CPU 103 first performs the first based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the start port switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is on (step S201; YES), the number of first special drawing holding memories, which is the number of holding memories for the special drawing game using the first special drawing, is a predetermined upper limit It is determined whether or not (step S202). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the number of first to-be-stored storages by reading the first to-be-stored storage number count value which is the storage value of the first to-be-stored storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. For example, when the first special figure storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; NO), the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1", for example ( Step S203).

  When the first start port switch 22A is off at step S201 (step S201; NO), or when the number of first special view storage blocks has reached the upper limit at step S202 (step S202; YES), Whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on is determined based on a detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B ( Step S204). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S204; YES), the second special view pending storage number, which is the pending storage number of the special view game using the second special view, is a predetermined upper limit value It is determined whether or not (step S205). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special image storage number by reading the second storage number count value, which is the storage value of the second storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special drawing reserve storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; NO), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" ( Step S206).

  After one of the processes in steps S203 and S206 is executed, the number of to-be-saved special-image storages according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is increased by one when the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special view game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is increased by 1 when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special view game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to add one (step S208). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to add one.

  After executing the processing of step S208, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result and the big hit type from among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 and the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR2 for the random number and the random number value MR3 for the determination of the variation pattern type are extracted (step S209). Numeric data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored at the head of the empty entry in the special view holding storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value by being set as holding information (step S210). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, numerical data representing random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special image storage unit 151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, Numerical data representing random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in second special image storage unit 151B.

  The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type indicate whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit". Used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "big hit". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used to determine the variation pattern type to which the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol belongs. The CPU 103 executes the processing of step S209 to select numerical data representing a part or all of the random display value used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative pattern or the variable display time. Extract.

  Subsequent to the process of step S210, transmission setting of the pending storage number notification command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step S211). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the storage control address of the first hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the transmission command buffer in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer, etc. The setting for transmitting the first pending storage number notification command is performed on T12. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, etc. The setting for transmitting the second pending storage number notification command is performed. For example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 15 is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 after the special symbol process process is finished. It is transmitted.

  Subsequent to the process of step S211, it is determined which one of a plurality of previously set numerical ranges the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination indicated by the numerical data extracted by the process of step S209 is included (step S212). In the present embodiment, the range of “8001 to 8437”, the range of “8438” to “11277”, and the range other than these are set in advance as the plurality of numerical value ranges. As an example, in the process of step S212, the minimum value and the maximum value in each numerical value range are set, and which numerical value range is included by comparison with the random value MR1 extracted in the process of step S209. It is sufficient if it can be determined.

  After execution of the processing of step S212, transmission setting of a winning determination result specification command is performed (step S213). FIG. 18 shows a configuration example of the in-winning determination result designation command for which transmission setting is performed in the process of step S213. In the prize determination result specifying command shown in FIG. 18, the EXT that is different according to the determination result of which of the plurality of numerical ranges the random number MR1 for special view display result determination extracted in the process of step S209 is included. Data is set. More specifically, the command 9500H is a winning combination determination result first specification command indicating that the random number MR1 is included in the range of "8001" to "8437". The command 9501H is a winning combination determination result second specification command indicating that the random number MR1 is in the range of “8438” to “11277”. The command 9502H is a winning combination determination result third designation command indicating that the random number MR1 is included in a range other than the above.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, regardless of whether or not the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the random number value MR1 is any one of "8001" to "8437", The special view display result is determined to be "big hit". Therefore, in the effect control board 12, it is determined that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit gaming state is controlled regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and the first determination command of winning determination result is determined. Designate to be identifiable on the side. If the random number MR1 is any one of "8438" to "11277", the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" only when the probability variation control is being performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to specify on the side of effect control board 12 that the variable display result is "big hit" and it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state when the gaming state is the definite variation state and the second judgment command upon winning a prize is determined. Specify to be The winning combination determination result third specification command specifies that it is possible to specify on the side of the effect control board 12 that the variable display result is “losing” and it is determined that the big hit gaming state is not to be controlled.

  After the process of step S213 is performed, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S215), step S204. Go to the process of On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S216), The start winning determination process ends. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect a starting winning combination of valid gaming balls, it is possible to surely complete the processing based on the detection of both starting starting winning combinations.

  In the start winning determination process, after the process of step S211 is performed, the process of step S213 is performed. By executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 15 after these processes are executed, the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the first start condition and the second start condition are obtained. When the start condition is satisfied, two commands, ie, a pending storage number notification command and a winning judgment result specification command, are collectively transmitted in one timer interrupt as one set. In addition, it is not limited to what is collectively transmitted in 1 timer interruption, and one command may be sequentially transmitted by the command control process of step S17 for every timer interruption.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 of FIG. 16, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 in accordance with the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is based on the presence / absence of the pending data stored in the first special view pending storage unit 151A or the second special view pending storage unit 151B. A determination is made as to whether or not the special figure game is to be started by the display device 4B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not to control the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit", based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result. The variable display result is determined before it is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, the finalized special symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is set corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game . In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, multiple types of variation pattern types are used using numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern type based on the preliminary determination result of whether or not the variable display result is "big hit". And the process of determining the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern based on the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like. There is. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

  By the special symbol normal processing in step S110 and the variation pattern setting processing in step S111, a variation pattern including the determined special symbol, the special symbol, and the variable symbol display time of the decorative symbol as the variable display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing are the random number value MR1 for determination of the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determination of the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern type, and the random value for variation pattern determination A process of determining a variable display mode of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is included using MR4.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special figure variation time timer value which is the storage value of the special figure variation time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is decremented by 1 or added 1 The same is true regardless of whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The timer measures the elapsed time. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation process of step S112 is the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special feature in the second special symbol display device 4B. It is sufficient that the processing of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special drawing game using the figure is performed by the common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop process, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol as the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. It includes the process of setting. Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on or not, and if the big hit flag is on, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". Be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special process process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, waiting time until the end of the execution time of the fanfare effect (effect to notify the start of big hit gaming state, big hit start effect) to be executed on the side of the production control board 12 (big hit start This process includes a process of waiting until the time effect waiting time has elapsed, and a process of starting execution of a round in the big hit gaming state and setting for opening the big winning opening. When the setting for opening the special winning opening is made, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of step S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. And the like are included to determine whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed, and then the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6". .

  The big hit opening post process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened reached the large winning opening opening frequency maximum value, the winning opening opening frequency maximum value was reached In this case, the process of setting for transmitting the end command is included. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum winning opening open number maximum value, while the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5", when the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value is reached, the special drawing The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, the waiting time until the end of the execution time of the ending effect (effect to notify the end of the big hit gaming state, also referred to as a big hit end effect) is performed on the side of the effect control board 12 (big hit end It includes a process of waiting until the time effect waiting time has elapsed, a process of performing various settings for starting the probability change control and the time reduction control, and the like. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol normal processing executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is "0" (step S231). The second special figure reservation storage count is the number of reserved storages of the special view game using the second special view by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S213, the second hold storage count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

  When the number of second special view reservations is other than “0” at step S 231 (step S 231; NO), the suspension stored corresponding to the suspension number “1” in second special view suspension storage unit 151 B As data, numerical data representing a random number value MR1 for special image display result determination, a random number value MR2 for large hit type determination, and a random value MR3 for variable pattern type determination are read out (step S232). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S232, for example, by updating the second reserved memory number count value by decrementing the second reserved memory number count value by one, and updating it so that the second special image reserved memory number is decremented by one, The holding data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the holding number "1" in the part 151B is shifted upward by one entry (step S233). In addition, in the process of step S233, the gaming control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total suspension storage count count value stored in the total suspension storage count counter. At this time, the variation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to "2" (step S234).

  When the number of second Tokushu storages is "0" at step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether or not the number of first special maps storage is "0" (step S235). The first special view reservation storage number is the number of suspension storages of the special view game using the first special view by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage count counter and determines whether the read value is "0". Just do it. As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of second special view reservations is “0”, and the number of first special views suspension storage is “0”. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the special view game using the second special view starts being executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view.

  When it is determined in step S235 that the number of first special view reservations is other than “0” (step S235; NO), the suspension stored corresponding to the suspension number “1” in first special view suspension storage unit 151A. As data, random number value MR1 for special figure display result decision, random number value MR2 for big hit classification decision and the numerical data which shows random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern category decision, it reads out respectively (step S236). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S 236, the first TOC pending memory number is updated to be decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting the first pending memory number count value and updating, etc. The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number "1" in the part 151A is shifted upward by one entry (step S237). Further, in the process of step S 237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total suspension storage count count value stored in the total suspension storage count counter. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

  After performing any of the processes in steps S234 and S238, it is possible to use the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, as a use table for determining whether the "big hit" or "losing" is made. The figure display result determination table 130 is selected and set (step S239). Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is compared with the determined value assigned to each special image display result of "big hit" or "lost". Then, it is determined whether the special map display result is to be "big hit" or "loss" (step S240). At this time, for example, by confirming the state of a probability variation flag (described later) provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like, it is determined whether or not the probability variation state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state Good.

  After the special view display result is determined in step S240, it is determined whether the special view display result is a "big hit" (step S241). Then, if it is determined that the "big hit" (step S241; YES), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as any of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the jackpot classification determination table 131 set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot classification determination stored in the random number buffer for variation is each jackpot of “first jackpot” or “second jackpot” In accordance with which of the determination values assigned to the type, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the process of step S244, for example, by setting the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), store the determined jackpot type Let As an example, if the big hit type is “first big hit”, the big hit type buffer value may be “1”, and if “big hit”, it may be “2”.

  If it is determined in step S241 that the game is not a "big hit" (step S241; NO) or after the process of step S245 is executed, the result of the predetermination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, In response to the determination result of the jackpot type in the game state, the determined special symbol is determined (step S246). As an example, when it is determined that the special figure display result is not a "big hit" in step S241, the special figure display result is "loss" in response to the pre-decision result indicating that the "loss" is made. A special symbol indicating a symbol of "-" is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S241 that the special view display result is "big hit", the "3" or "7" that is the big hit symbol according to the big hit type determination result in step S244. Set one of the special symbols that show numbers to the finalized special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "first jackpot", a special symbol indicating a number of "3" which is a 6R jackpot symbol is set as the determined special symbol. Also, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "the second jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number of "7" that is the 16R jackpot symbol is set as the determined special symbol.

  After setting the finalized special symbol in step S246, the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S247), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. . If, in step S235, the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game using the first special drawing is "0" (step S235; YES), after performing predetermined demonstration display setting (step S248), the special symbol End normal processing. In this demonstration display setting, for example, whether or not an effect control command for specifying a demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image or the like on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 or not. Determine At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process performed in step S111 of FIG. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 20, the CPU 103 first determines whether the big hit flag is on (step S261). Then, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; YES), the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A is selected and set as a use table for determining the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types (step S262). ). Further, for example, by reading the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, it is specified whether the jackpot type is "first jackpot" or "second jackpot" (step S263). .

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; NO), time reduction control is being performed, for example, by determining whether the time short flag (described later) provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on or not. It is determined whether or not (step S 264). When the time saving control is not being performed (step S 264; NO), the lost change pattern type determination table (normal time) 132 B is selected and set as a use table for determining the change pattern type to any one of a plurality of types (step S265). If time reduction control is in progress in step S 264 (step S 264; YES), a loss change pattern type determination table (during time reduction control) 132 C is selected and set in the use table for determining the change pattern type (step S S266). When one of the processes in steps S265 and S266 is executed, the total pending storage number may be specified, for example, by reading the storage value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  After one of the processes in steps S263, S265, and S266 is executed, it is set in the use table based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern type stored in the variation random number buffer etc. The variation pattern type is determined to be any one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern type determination table (step S 267).

  That is, when the big hit flag is on, the table data corresponding to the big hit type specified by the process of step S263 is selected from the table data constituting the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A selected in step S262. Then, the variation pattern type to which the determination value corresponding to the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned is determined.

  When the big hit flag is off, the lost variation pattern type determination table (normal) 132B selected in step S265 or the lost variation pattern type determination table (during time reduction control) 132C selected in step S265. Then, the table data corresponding to the total number of pending storages is selected, and the variation pattern type to which the determination value corresponding to the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern type is assigned is determined.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S267, the variation pattern determination table 133 is selected, and the variation pattern is set as a use table for determining any of a plurality of types (step S268). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be any one of a plurality of types by referring to the fluctuation pattern determination table 133 set in step S268 based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for fluctuation pattern determination (step S269).

  The numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 when the process of step S269 is executed, or the first start winning combination The game balls that have passed through the mouth and the second start winning opening are extracted at the time of the start winning being detected, together with random number values MR1 to MR3, in the first special view holding storage unit 151A and the second special view holding storage unit 151B. It may be stored as hold information.

  After the change pattern is determined in step S269, a special view change time which is a variable display time of the special symbol is set (step S270). Specifically, the CPU 103 may set the special figure fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern determined in step S269 as the timer initial value of the special figure fluctuation time timer. Since the timer value of the special figure fluctuation time timer is decremented by one every timer interrupt, the value set as the timer initial value is a value based on the interrupt cycle T. For example, if the interrupt cycle is Tms, since the number of occurrences of the interrupt per second is 1000 / T (times), the timer initial value for one second is 1000 / T. For example, if the interrupt cycle T is 4 ms, the timer initial value for one second is "250". The same is true for the timer initial values of other timers (for example, special figure finalized display time timer etc.) on the main substrate 11 side and timer initial values of each timer (for example, notification time limit timer etc.) of the effect control board 12 It is.

  After executing the process of step S270, according to the variation special view designation buffer value, the special view game using the first special view in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special in the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to start any one of the special drawing games using the figures, setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed (step S271). As an example, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S271, setting for transmitting various commands used for the start of variation of the special symbol is performed (step S272). For example, when the fluctuation special view designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 causes the main board 11 to issue a game state designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the first hold storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 The transmission command buffer stores the data in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 causes the main board 11 to issue a game state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. In the buffer area. Thereafter, the value of the special view process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S273), and the variation pattern setting process is ended.

  FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step 113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 21, the CPU 103 first determines, for example, whether the special view final display flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like is on (step S291). Here, the special view finalization display flag is set to the on state by the processing of step S295 in response to the finalization display of the finalization special symbol as the variable display result in the special view game.

  When the flag for displaying special figure confirmation is off at step S291 (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol (step S292). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a symbol determination designation command to the effect control board 12 (step S293). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets a special view finalized display time which is a stop display time of the finalized special symbol (step S294). Specifically, CPU 103 sets a special figure determination display time as a timer initial value of the special figure determination display time timer value which is a storage value of the special figure determination display time timer provided in game control timer setting unit 153. Just set it. In the present embodiment, the time related to the fluctuation pattern is the special drawing fluctuation time, and the special drawing determination display time is a time not related to the fluctuation pattern (for example, a fixed time), but in addition to the special drawing fluctuation time The special view determination display time may be a time related to the variation pattern. For example, assuming that the total time of the special figure fluctuation time and the special figure determination display time corresponds to the fluctuation pattern, the timer initial value of the special figure fluctuation time timer and the timer initial value of the special figure determination display time timer according to the fluctuation pattern May be set.

  Subsequent to the process of step S294, CPU 103 sets the flag during special image determination display to ON (step S295), and ends the special symbol stop process.

  If it is determined in step S291 that the flag for displaying special figure confirmation is on (step S291; YES), it is determined whether the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). In the process of step S296, for example, it may be determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer in which the timer initial value is set in step S294 has timed out (the special figure fluctuation time timer value has become 0). . If the special figure determination display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; NO), the special symbol stop process is ended, and the process waits until the special figure determination display time has elapsed.

  When the special figure determination display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; YES), after the special figure determination display flag is cleared and turned off (step S297), it is determined whether the big hit flag is on or not. It determines (S298). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S 298; YES), a big hit start presentation waiting time is set (step S 299). Specifically, a predetermined big hit start waiting time as a timer initial value of the big hit start waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the big hit start waiting time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 Just set it.

  Subsequent to the process of step S299, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command according to the big hit type buffer value is a send command in the send command buffer. It may be stored in the buffer area specified by the pointer.

  Subsequent to the process of step S300, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag and turns it off (step S301). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets, for example, a big hit start time flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like to an on state (step S302). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs setting for ending the time saving state or the probability changing state (step S303). In the process of step S303, for example, the process of clearing the time saving flag or the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and turning it off, or clearing the time saving counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 A process of initializing the count value of the time saving number to "0", a process of clearing the count value of the probability of variation by clearing the probability variation frequency counter, and the like may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the time saving flag is set to the on state when controlled to the time saving state in which the high release control and the time saving control are performed, and is cleared to the off state when the time saving state ends. That is, when the time saving flag is in the on state, it indicates that the gaming state is in the time saving state, and high open control and time saving control are performed. The probability change flag is set to the on state when controlled to the probability change state in which the probability change control is performed, and is cleared to be turned off when the probability change state ends. That is, the fact that the probability change flag is in the on state indicates that the gaming state is the probability change state, and probability change control is performed. Further, the time reduction counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of times of the special figure game in which the time reduction control and the high release control are performed. The probability variation number counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining times of the special figure game in which probability variation control is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S303, setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S304). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the side of the effect control board 12. In the present embodiment, the game state designation command is transmitted even if the game state does not change even when the game state changes, but when the game state changes (for example, from the time saving state or the probability change state to the normal state) The game state designation command may be transmitted only when the change occurs. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the current gaming state is specified (including the specification that the gaming state has changed) from the contents of the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 11, but in the game state designation command Alternatively, the current game state may be specified by receiving a hit start designation command. In this case, the game state designation command may not be transmitted by the process of step S304 or the like. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step S305), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; NO), it is determined whether or not the time saving state or the probability changing state is ended (step S306). For example, in the process of step S306, when the time saving flag is on, the time saving count value, which is the stored value of the time saving counter, is updated by subtracting 1, for example. It is determined whether or not the updated time count value matches the time reduction end determination value (for example, “0”). It may be determined not to end the time saving state if the updated time count value does not match the time reduction end determination value, and it may be determined to end the time saving state if it matches. Further, in the process of step S306, when the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number count value stored in the probability variation number counter is updated, for example, by subtracting one. It is determined whether or not the count value of the number of times of probability variation after updating matches the probability variation end determination value (for example, “0”). If the count value of the probability variation count after the update does not match the probability variation end determination value, it may be determined not to end the probability variation state, and if it matches, it may be determined to terminate the probability change status. When it is determined that the time saving state is to be ended, the time saving flag is cleared to be in the off state, and the time saving state (time saving control, high release control) is ended. When it is determined that the definite change state is to be ended, the positive change flag is cleared to be in the OFF state, and the positive change state (positive change control) is ended. In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is assumed to be in either the low probability low base state or the high probability high base state gaming state, so when the time saving flag is on, the probability change flag is on, The initial value set in the probability variation counter so that the time variation flag is off when the time saving flag is off, the time saving flag is on when the probability variation flag is on, and the time saving flag is off when the probability variation flag is off And the initial value set in the time saving number counter are the same value (for example, 100 times) (steps S322 and S323 of the big hit end process).

  Subsequent to the process of step S306, setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S307). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the side of the effect control board 12. In the present embodiment, the game state designation command is transmitted even if the game state does not change even when the game state changes, but when the game state changes (for example, from the time saving state or the probability change state to the normal state) The game state designation command may be transmitted only when the change occurs. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the current gaming state is specified (including the specification that the gaming state has changed) from the contents of the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 11, but in place of this, the main The present gaming state may be specified by counting the number of times the variable display is executed on the side of the effect control board 12 independently of the side of the board 11. In this case, the game state designation command may not be transmitted by the process of step S307 or the like. After that, when it is determined in step S306 that the definite variation state is to be ended, setting for transmitting a definite variation end command is performed (step S308). When the definite change state is not ended, the setting for transmitting the positive change end command is not performed. In addition, even if the positive variation state ends when the big hit flag is on (step S303), the setting for transmitting the positive variation end command is not performed. Then, the special figure process flag is cleared, and the value is initialized to "0" (step S309), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening pre-processing performed in step S114 of FIG. In the big hit opening pre-processing shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit start flag is on (step S131). Here, the big hit start time flag is set to the on state in response to the big hit flag being on in the special symbol stopping process of step S113 shown in FIG.

  If the big hit start time flag is not on in step S131 (step S131; NO), a winning opening determination process (see FIG. 25) is executed (step S220), and the process proceeds to step S138. As described above, in addition to the big hit opening process in step S115, the winning opening determination process is executed also in the big hit opening post process in step S114 to preferably detect a winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit judgment value. Can. For example, over prize winning can be suitably detected during the next open standby (while step S 138 (YES)). The winning opening determination process will be described later.

  If the big hit start time flag is on in step S131 (step S131; YES), it is determined whether or not the big hit start effect waiting time has elapsed (step S132). In the process of step S132, for example, whether or not the big hit start effect waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S299 of the special symbol stop process has timed out (the big hit start effect wait time timer value becomes 0 Or not).

  If the jackpot start production waiting time has not elapsed (step S132; NO), the jackpot opening pre-processing is ended. If the jackpot start effect waiting time has elapsed (step S132; YES), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot start flag (step S134). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the special winning opening open frequency counter (step S135). Specifically, the special winning opening open frequency count value is initialized to "1". Subsequently, the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S136).

  Following the process of step S136, an open control pattern corresponding to the big hit type buffer value read in step S136 is set (step S137). At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 23A, if the big hit type buffer value is “1”, the release control pattern of the release KP1 is set. On the other hand, if the big hit type buffer value is "2", the release control pattern of the release KP2 is set.

  Following the process of step S137 or the process of step S220, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the next open standby is in progress (step S138). That is, it is determined whether it is in the interval period until the big winning opening is opened as the next round. In the process of step S138, for example, whether or not the round start waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S366 of the big hit open post-processing timed out (whether the round start waiting time timer value became 0) It is sufficient to determine If the next open standby (step S138; YES), that is, if the interval period has not ended, the big hit open pre-processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if not waiting for opening next time (step S138; NO), that is, if the interval period has ended, the CPU 103 controls the start of the opening of the special winning opening (step S139). For example, the CPU 103 sets an opening time for opening the big winning opening based on the opening control pattern set in step S137 and the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter, and the big winning opening is opened. To set. Specifically, in the process of step S139, the CPU 103 sets the opening control set in step S137 as the timer initial value of the opening time timer value which is the storage value of the opening time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. What is necessary is just to set the big winning opening opening time (upper limit time made into an open state) of a pattern. For example, when the release control pattern of the release KP1 shown in FIG. 23B is set, the timer initial value is 29 only when the count value of the special winning opening open number counter is “1” to “6”. When the open control pattern of the open KP 2 shown in FIG. 23B is set, for example, the count value of the special winning opening open number counter is any of “1” to “16”. Also in this case, 29.5 seconds may be set as the timer initial value. Further, in the process of step S139, for example, the solenoid drive signal to a predetermined large winning opening door solenoid is started to be output via a predetermined solenoid circuit, or the like. The mouth door solenoid may be set to the on state.

  Subsequent to the process of step S139, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting the special winning opening open notification command to the effect control board 12 (step S140). Subsequently, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special view process flag to “5” which is a value corresponding to the big hit open process (step S141), and ends the big hit open pre-processing process.

  FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the big hit open process executed in step S115 of FIG. In the big hit open process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first determines whether the big winning opening open upper limit time has elapsed (step S121). If the special winning opening open upper limit time has not elapsed (step S121; NO), the winning opening determination processing is executed (step S220). 25 shows the big hit open pre-processing of FIG. 22 (step S114), the big hit open processing of FIG. 24 (step S115), the big hit open post processing of FIG. 26 (step S116), and the big hit end processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the winning a prize mouth judging processing performed at.

In the winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 25, the CPU 103 first determines whether the detection signal transmitted from the count switch 23 has been turned on (step S221).
If the count switch 23 is not on (step S221; NO), the process proceeds to step S225.

  When count switch 23 is on (step S221; YES), transmission setting of the big winning opening winning notification command for notifying winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening is performed to effect control board 12 (Step S222). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the special view process flag is "5" which is a value corresponding to the big hit open processing (step S223). If the value of the special view process flag is not "5" which is a value corresponding to the big hit open process (step S223; NO), the process proceeds to step S225.

  If the value of the special view process flag is "5" corresponding to the big hit open processing (step S223; YES), the number of winnings which is the storage value of the winning number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 The count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S224). The number-of-winning-pieces count value may indicate the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23 while one round game is being executed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the detection signal transmitted from the general winning opening switch 24A is turned on (step S225). If the general winning a prize opening switch 24A is not on (step S225; NO), the winning a prize opening determination processing is ended. When the general winning opening switch 24A is on (step S225; YES), transmission setting of a general winning opening winning notification command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening is performed. (Step S226). Then, the winning opening determination processing ends.

  It returns to FIG. Subsequently to the winning opening determination processing shown in FIG. 25, it is determined whether or not the winning number count value has reached a predetermined winning upper limit determination value ("10" in the present embodiment) (step S126). If the winning upper limit judgment value has not been reached (step S126; NO), the processing in the big hit open ends. Here, since the value of the special process process flag is not updated, the process during the big hit open is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs.

  On the other hand, if the large winning opening opening upper limit time has elapsed in step S121 (step S121; YES), or if it is determined in step S126 that the winning upper limit determination value has been reached (step S126; YES), It is determined that the round game is ended, and an open end control is performed to return the large winning opening in the open state to the closed state (step S127). At this time, setting for stopping transmission of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 may be performed.

  Following the process of step S127, the winning number counter is cleared to initialize the winning number count value to "0" (step 128). Then, after updating the value of the special view process flag to “6” corresponding to the big hit open post-processing (step S129), the big hit open processing is ended.

  FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the big hit opening post process executed in step S116 of FIG. In the big hit opening post process shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 103 first executes the winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 25 (step S220). As described above, in addition to the big hit opening process in step S115, the winning opening determination process is executed also in the big hit opening post process in step S116 to preferably detect a winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit judgment value. Can.

  After executing the winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 25, the CPU 103 updates the big winning opening open number count value so as to be incremented by 1 (step S364). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the updated special winning opening open frequency count value has become the maximum value (step S365).

  The "maximum value" in step S365 is to be compared with the updated number of times of opening of the special winning opening, and the initial value of the number of times of opening of the special winning opening is "1". The maximum value is a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. For example, in the case of the first big hit where the upper limit number of rounds is 6 times, the "maximum value" is "7", and in the case of the second big hit where the upper limit number of rounds is 16 times, the "maximum value" is It is "17". It should be noted that the "maximum value" may be compared with the number of times of opening the number of times of opening before being updated instead of the number of times of opening the number of times of opening after updating. In this case, the “maximum value” may be set as the upper limit number of rounds.

  If the special winning opening open frequency count value is other than the maximum value (step S365; NO), a round start waiting time (interval time) is set (step S366). Specifically, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined round start waiting time as a timer initial value of a round start waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the round start waiting time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Just do it. Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a notification command after opening the special winning opening to the effect control board 12 (step S367). After the process of step S367 is performed, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step S368), and the big hit opening post-process is ended. In this manner, the process of steps S114 to S116 shown in FIG. 16 is repeatedly executed until it is determined in the process of step S365 that the updated special winning opening open frequency count value is the maximum value, thereby achieving a big hit gaming state. It is possible to execute a plurality of rounds in which the big winning opening is opened. Also, by setting the round start waiting time in the process of step S366, the next open standby is performed in the process of step S114 shown in FIG. 16 until the round start waiting time has elapsed (step S138; YES) The next round can be started with a desired interval period.

  When it is determined in step S365 that the big winning opening open frequency count value is the maximum value (step S365; YES), a jackpot end effect waiting time is set (step S369). Specifically, as a timer initial value of the big hit end presentation waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the big hit end presentation waiting time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, a predetermined big hit end presentation waiting time as a timer initial value Just set it. Subsequently, a setting for transmitting a hit end designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S370). Thereafter, the value of the special view process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S371), and the big hit open post-process is ended. In this manner, by setting the big hit end presentation waiting time in the process of step S369, the process according to step S117 shown in FIG. 16 corresponds to the end of the ending presentation executed on the side of the presentation control board 12 The special symbol normal processing of step S110 shown in FIG. 16 can be executed.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the big hit end process shown in FIG. 27, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end effect waiting time has elapsed (S321). In the process of step S321, for example, whether or not the big hit end effect waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S369 of the big hit open post-processing timed out (the big hit end effect waiting time timer value becomes 0 Or not). If the jackpot end effect waiting time has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; NO), the winning opening determination processing shown in FIG. 25 is executed (step S220), and the jackpot end processing is ended. As described above, in addition to the big hit open process in step S115, the winning opening determination process is executed also in the big hit end process in step S117 to preferably detect a winning (over winning) exceeding the high winning limit determination value. it can.

  If the jackpot end effect waiting time has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; YES), setting for starting the probability change control is performed (step S322). Specifically, in the process of step S322, the probability variation flag is set to the on state, and an initial value (for example, 100 times) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game capable of performing probability variation control is set in the probability variation counter .

  Following the processing of step S322, setting for starting the time saving control and the high release control is performed (step S323). Specifically, in the process of step S323, the hour reduction flag is set to the on state, and an initial value (for example, 100 times) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game capable of executing the time reduction control or the high release control is reduced Set in the counter.

  Subsequent to the process of step S322, setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S324). Thereby, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the side of the effect control board 12. After that, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "0" (step S325), and the execution of the big hit end process is ended.

  In addition, when the setting for starting high open control is performed by big hit completion processing, the process for performing high open control is performed in the normal symbol process process of step S16 shown in FIG. For example, when the time saving flag is on, the ratio for determining that the common drawing display result is “per common drawing” may be higher than when the time saving flag is not on. As an example, the number of determined values (values to be compared with the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the result of the common drawing display) assigned to “per common drawing” to be referred to when the time saving flag is on is More than the number of decision values (values to be compared with the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determination of the common drawing display result) that are assigned to “per common drawing” to be referenced when the time saving flag is not on By using the display result determination table, when the time saving flag is on, the ratio of making the common drawing display result “per common drawing” is higher than when the time saving flag is not on. It is also good. For example, when the time saving flag is on, the variable display time of the normal symbol may be shorter than when the time saving flag is not on. Further, when the time saving flag is on, the tilt control time or the number of tilt controls may be increased more than when the time saving flag is not on.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 28 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12 Performs register settings etc. of mounted CTC. Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time the predetermined time passes. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue prohibited orders. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, a control signal serving as an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 Capture The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte and the second byte are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on at step S72 (step S72; YES), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read and then read. Settings, control, and the like corresponding to the output control command issued are performed.

  After the command analysis process is performed in step S74, an effect control process process is performed (step S75). In the effect control process of step S75, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, the effect With regard to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, such as the driving operation in the phantom, the determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the rendering control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 are performed.

  Following the effect control process of step S75, effect random number updating process is executed (step S76), and the effect random number is counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 as various random number values used for effect control. The numerical data representing the is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S72.

  FIGS. 29 and 30 are flowcharts showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S74 of FIG. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 29, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer, etc., whereby the received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 is It is determined whether there is any (step S501). If there is no reception command (step S501; NO), the command analysis process is ended.

  If there is a reception command (step S501; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reception command is a variable display result notification command, for example, by confirming MODE data of the reception command. (Step S503). When the received command is a variable display result notification command (step S503; YES), it is determined whether the received variable display result command is a command corresponding to a big hit (S504). When the received variable display result command is a command corresponding to a big hit (step S504; YES), it is determined whether or not a winning ball number processing flag is set (step S505). When the winning balls number processing flag is not set (step S505; NO), the winning balls number processing flag is set (step S506). If the received command is not the variable display result notification command in step S503 (step S503; NO), if the received variable display result command is not the command corresponding to the big hit in step S504 (step S504; NO), the prize is received in step S505. If the ball number processing flag is set (step S505; YES), the process proceeds to step S507.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the received command is a special winning opening winning notification command (step S507). When it is the special winning opening winning notification command (step S507; YES), the effect control CPU 120 counts the special winning opening winning number which is the storage value of the special winning opening winning number counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. The value is updated so as to add 1 (step S508). Then, the command analysis processing ends. The special winning opening winning count count value indicates the number of times the game ball has won in the special winning opening after the round is executed until the next round is executed.

  When it is determined in step S507 that the received command is not a special winning opening winning notification command (step S507; NO), CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the receiving command is a general winning opening winning notification command (step S509). . When it is a general winning a prize opening winning a prize notification command (step S509; YES), it renews so that 1 may be added to the general winning a prize opening winning a prize count value (step S510). Then, the command analysis processing ends. The general winning opening number win count value indicates the number of times the game ball has won in the general winning opening after the round is executed until the next round is executed.

  When it is determined in step S509 that the received command is not a general winning a prize opening winning notice command (step S509; NO), CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the received command is a special winning opening open notifying command (step S511). ). When it is the special winning opening open notification command (step S511; YES), the special winning opening open flag is set (step S512), the special winning opening winning frequency counter is cleared and the special winning opening winning frequency count value is " The command is initialized to 0 (step S513), and the command analysis process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S513 that the received command is not the special winning opening open notification command (step S513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is the special winning opening open notification command (step S514). When it is the notification command after big winning opening opening (step S514; YES), the flag after big winning opening opening is set (step S515), and command analysis processing is ended.

  When it is determined in step S514 that the received command is not the notification command after the big winning opening open (step S514; NO), as shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is a hit start designation command or not. It determines (step S518). If it is a hit start designation command (step S518; YES), a hit start designation command reception flag and a prize ball number calculation execution flag are set (step S519), and the command analysis processing is ended.

  When it is determined in step S518 that the received command is not a hit start designation command (step S518; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is a hit end designation command (step S520). If it is a hit end designation command (step S520; YES), a hit end designation command reception flag and a prize ball number calculation end flag are set (step S521), and the command analysis processing is ended.

  When it is determined in step S520 that the received command is not a hit end designation command (step S520; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received command is a game state designation command (step S522). If it is a gaming state designation command (step S522; YES), the high probability flag and the high base flag are switched on / off based on the content of the received gaming state designation command (step S523). The high certainty flag is provided, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit 191, and is turned on in response to the definite change state, and switching of the on / off state of the positive change flag on the main substrate 11 side Correspondingly, the on / off state is switched. The high base flag is provided, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit 191, and is turned on in response to the time shortening state, and is used to switch the on / off state of the time shortening flag on the main substrate 11 side. Correspondingly, the on / off state is switched. Specifically, when the gaming state designation command designates the high probability / high base state, the effect control CPU 120 turns on both the high probability flag and the high base flag. If the game state designating command is for designating the high probability low base state, the high probability flag is turned on and the high base flag is turned off. If the game state designating command is for designating a low probability high base state, the high probability flag is turned off and the high base flag is turned on. If the game state designation command is to designate a low probability low base state, both the high probability flag and the high base flag are turned off. In the present embodiment, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the gaming state in either the low probability low base state or the high probability high base state, the received game state designating command designates the low probability low base state. It is either a gaming state designation command or a gaming state designation command for designating a high probability high base state. Thereafter, the command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S522 that the received command is not a gaming state designating command (step S522; NO), it is determined whether the received command is a definite variation designating command (step S525). If it is a definite variation end designation command (step S525; YES), the winning ball number processing flag is cleared (step S526). Further, when the definite variation end designation command is received, it is determined that the big hit continuous unit has ended, and the accumulated award ball number display counter is cleared (step S527), and the current award ball number display count value is set to 0. End the command analysis process. If the command is not a definite variation end designation command (step S525; NO), setting according to other received commands is performed (step S528), and the command analysis processing is terminated.

  FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S75 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 31, the effect control CPU 120 first executes winning ball number related processing (step S150). Thereafter, in accordance with the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit, one of the processes in steps S170 to S177 is selected and executed.

  FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of winning balls number related processing executed in step S150 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 32, in the prize ball number related process, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the prize ball number processing flag is set (step S601). When the winning balls number processing flag is not set (step S601; NO), the winning balls number related processing is ended.

  When the award ball number processing flag is set in step S601 (step S601; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an award ball number calculation execution flag is set (step S602). If the winning ball number calculation execution flag is not set (step S602; NO), the process proceeds to step S604.

  When the award ball number calculation execution flag is set (step S602; YES), the CPU 120 for effect control calculates the number of award balls and the cumulative number of award balls (step S603). This time with the winning ball number, it is paid by the game ball winning in the large winning opening (special variable winning ball device 7) or the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B) at this big hit It is the total number of prize balls issued. The current prize ball number is counted by the present prize ball number display counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. With the cumulative winning number of balls, the game ball is winning in the large winning opening (special variable winning ball device 7) or the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B) during the jackpot of the big hit The total number of prize balls paid out by The cumulative award ball number is updated by the cumulative award ball number display counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. For example, in the command analysis process (step S74) shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the big winning opening winning notice command (step S507; YES), The current prize ball number display count value which is a stored value and the accumulated prize ball number display count value which is a stored value of the accumulated prize ball number display counter are incremented by 15. The cumulative winning number is a winning number which is cleared when the probability variation end designation command is received and the winning number processing flag is cleared. For this reason, the accumulated winning number of balls is a cumulative value of the number of winning balls in the consecutive units in the big hit gaming state.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the winning ball number calculation end flag is set (step S604). If the winning ball number calculation end flag is not set (step S604; NO), the process proceeds to step S607. When the winning ball number calculation end flag is set (step S604; YES), the CPU for effect control 120 clears the winning ball number calculation execution flag and the winning ball number calculation flag (step S605).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the number of award balls this time to the number of balls in the past (step S606). Specifically, the count value of the current prize ball number display counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (this time prize ball number display count value) is transferred to the past prize ball number display count value, and the current prize ball number is displayed. Clear the number display counter, and set the current ball count display count value to 0. Further, the effect control CPU 10 shifts the Nth previous prize ball number display count value (N: integer) to (N + 1) th previous prize ball number display count value, and the 50th previous prize ball number display count value to erase.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 performs notification of the number of winning balls (step S607). In the prize ball number notification, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), the number of past prize balls in each of the past N (six in this case) big hits and the cumulative number of these prize balls are displayed. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 executes display switching processing (step S608).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the display switching process performed in step S608 in FIG. In the display switching process, a process of switching the contents of a predetermined effect and a specific effect to be executed during a big hit and during a definite change is executed. In the present embodiment, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are provided in the predetermined effect, and the first specific effect and the second specific effect are provided in the specific effect. In the predetermined effect, the number of winning balls in a row is reported. There are also cases where there is no predetermined effect. The specific content of these predetermined effects and specific effects will be further described later.

  In the display switching process, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the push button 31B has been operated (step S651). This determination is performed based on whether an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 31B has been detected is transmitted from the push sensor 35B. If the push button 31B has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S658.

  When the push button 31B is operated in step S651 (step S651; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether reach is established (step S652). This determination is performed based on the transmitted fluctuation pattern command and the time from when the fluctuation according to the fluctuation pattern designation command is started. When reach is being established (step S652; YES), the process proceeds to step S658.

  When reach is not established at step S652 (step S652; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first predetermined effect is being executed (step S653). When the first predetermined effect is being executed (step S653: YES), the effect is switched from the first predetermined effect to the second predetermined effect (step S654). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S658. When the first predetermined effect is not being executed (step S653; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the second predetermined effect is being executed (step S655).

  When the second predetermined effect is being executed (step S655; YES), the effect control CPU 120 switches the second predetermined effect to no predetermined effect (step S656). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S658. When the second predetermined effect is not being executed (step S655; NO), there is no predetermined effect. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 switches the predetermined effect from the state of no effect to the first predetermined effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S658.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the stick controller 31A has been operated (step S658). This determination is performed based on whether or not an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 31A has been detected is transmitted from the controller sensor unit 35A. When there is no operation of the stick controller 31A (step S658; NO), the display switching process is ended.

  When the stick controller 31A has been operated at step S658 (step S658; YES), it is determined whether or not the first specific effect is being executed (step S659). When the first specific effect is being executed (step S659; YES), the specific effect is switched to the second specific effect (step S660). Thereafter, the display switching process is ended.

  When the first specific effect is not being executed at step S659 (step S659; NO), the second specific effect is being executed as a specific effect. At this time, the specific effect is switched to the first specific effect (step S661). Thus, the display switching process ends.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0". For example, in the variable display start waiting process, the image display device 5 is selected based on whether or not a predetermined effect control command (for example, a change pattern specification command, a first change start command, or a second change start command) is received. A process is performed to determine whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol in. After performing the above-described processing, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". For example, in the variable display start setting process, in response to the start of the special view game, in order to perform the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 and other various rendering operations, A process of determining an effect control pattern or the like is performed. After performing the above-described processing, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". For example, in the variable display effect process, a process of executing various effects such as variable display of a decorative pattern is performed based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process of step S171. After performing the above-described processing, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "3".

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S173 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." For example, in the special processing for waiting for special drawing, processing for stopping the finalized decorative symbol is performed. When a big hit is made, processing for setting fanfare effects is performed, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". When the player loses the game, a process of controlling the game state is performed, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0".

  The jackpot start process of step S174 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4." For example, in the big hit start process, a process of executing a fanfare effect or a process of setting an effect during opening that is executed when the big winning opening is in an open state is performed. After performing the above-described processing, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "5".

  The process during the round of step S175 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". For example, in the in-round process, a process of executing an effect during opening or a process of setting an effect during closing executed when the big winning opening is in a closed state is performed. After performing the above-described processing, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "6".

  The post-round process of step S176 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". For example, in the post-round process, a process of executing an effect during closing or a process of setting an effect during opening is performed when it is not the final round, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”. When it is the final round, processing for setting an ending effect is performed, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7".

  The jackpot end post-processing in step S177 is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is "7". For example, in the big hit end post processing, processing to execute ending effect and processing to control the gaming state are performed, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 34, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the final stop symbol (finalized symbol) by reading the EXT data in the display result designation command or the like (the effect control CPU 120) Step S701). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern based on the fluctuation pattern (step S702). That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 as the usage pattern. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold digest process (step S703). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the decorative symbol fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern as an initial value of the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer value which is the storage value of the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Is set (step S704), the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172) (step S705), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of FIG. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer value (step S710), and determines whether the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer value has become 0 or not. (Step S711). That is, it is determined whether or not the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out (whether or not the decorative symbol variation time has elapsed). When the decorative symbol variation time timer value is not 0 (step S711; NO), the variable display execution control is controlled according to the effect control pattern set as the usage pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S712) During the variable display, the effect processing ends. When the decorative symbol variation time timer value becomes 0 (step S711; YES), the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "3" corresponding to the special processing waiting process (step S173) (step S713), variable While displaying, the rendering process is ended.

  FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the special figure-per-wait process executed in step S173 of FIG. In special processing per special drawing shown in FIG. 36, CPU 120 for effect control first determines whether or not a symbol determination designation command reception flag is set (step S720). When the symbol determination designating command reception flag is not set (step S720; NO), the special figure hit waiting process is ended.

  When the symbol determination designating command reception flag is set (step S720; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the symbol determination designating command reception flag (step S721), and stops and displays the determined decoration symbol (step S722). ). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the determined decoration symbol is a big hit symbol (step S723). If the finalized decoration symbol is not a big hit symbol (step S723: NO), the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "0" corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step S726), and the special symbol waiting process is performed. Finish.

  If the finalized decorative symbol is a big hit symbol (step S723: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the hit start designation command reception flag is set or not (step S730). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command has been received. When the hit start designating command reception flag is not set (step S 730; NO), the special figure hit waiting process is ended.

  When the hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S730; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the hit start designation command reception flag (step S731). Subsequently, the CPU for effect control 120 sets fanfare effect (step S733), updates the value of the effect process flag to "4" corresponding to the big hit start process (step S174) (step S734), and waits for a special image. End the process.

  FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot start process executed in step S174 of FIG. In the big hit start process shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 120 for effect control first determines whether or not the big winning opening open flag is set (step S741). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special winning opening open notification command has been received. When the special winning opening open flag is not set (step S741; NO), the execution of the fanfare effect set in the special processing-per-wait processing is controlled (step S742), and the big hit start processing is ended.

  When the special winning opening open flag is set (step S741; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the special winning opening open flag (step S743), and sets an opening effect (step S744). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" corresponding to the process during the round (step S175) (step S745), and the big hit start process is ended.

  FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the process during the round executed in step S175 of FIG. In the in-round processing shown in FIG. 38, the CPU 120 for effect control first determines whether the flag after opening the special winning opening is set (step S751). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the notification command after the opening of the special winning opening has been received. When the flag after opening the special winning opening is not set (step S751; NO), the execution of the effect during opening set in the big hit start processing is controlled (step S752), and the processing in the round is ended.

  If the flag after opening the special winning opening is set (step S751; YES), the CPU 120 for effect control clears the flag after opening the special winning opening (step S753) and sets the effect during closing (step S754) Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "6" corresponding to the post-round process (step S176) (step S755), and the process during the round is ended.

  FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the post-round process performed in step S176 of FIG. In the round post-processing shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether a hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S760). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit end designation command has been received. When the hit end designation command reception flag is not set (step S760; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the big winning opening open flag is set (step S761). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special winning opening open notification command has been received. When the special winning opening open flag is not set (step S761; NO), the execution of the effect during closing set in the processing during round is controlled (step S762), and the post round processing is ended.

  When the special winning opening open flag is set (step S761; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the special winning opening open flag (step S763), and sets an opening effect (step S764). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" corresponding to the in-round process (step S175) (step S765), and the round post-process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S760; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the hit end designation command reception flag (step S766), and sets the ending effect (step S767). ). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined ending effect time as an initial value of the ending effect time timer value which is a stored value of the ending effect time timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 (step S768) Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" corresponding to the big hit end post process (step S177) (step S769), and the round post process is ended.

  FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end post process executed in step S177 of FIG. In the big hit end post processing shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the ending effect time timer value (step S770), and determines whether the ending effect time timer value has become 0 (step S771). ). That is, it is determined whether the ending effect time timer has timed out (whether the ending effect time has elapsed). If the ending effect time timer value is not 0 (step S771; NO), execution of the ending effect set in the process during the round is controlled (step S772), and the big hit end post-processing is ended. When the ending effect time timer value becomes 0 (step S771; YES), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step S773), and the big hit end Finish post processing.

  Next, the rendering operation in the big hit gaming state will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of a rendering operation and the like during the big hit gaming state. When transitioning to the big hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. 41A, the character of “big hit” is displayed large on the image display device 5. After that, it shifts to the big hit game state.

  During the jackpot gaming state, a predetermined effect and a jackpot specific effect are executed. The predetermined effect displays information on the current and current jackpots. In the jackpot specific effect, a production whose main purpose is to boost the jackpot gaming state is executed. Here, the first predetermined effect and the big hit first specific effect are executed as the predetermined effect and the big hit specific effect. As shown in FIG. 41 (B), in the first predetermined effect, the first big hit icon 301 (big hit icon 300) is displayed on the upper left of the image display device 5, and the cumulative award ball number is on the upper right of the image display device 5. An effect that the display area 400 is displayed is performed. The cumulative winning number display area 400 displays the cumulative winning number. This first predetermined effect displays information that the current jackpot is the first jackpot and information such as the current cumulative number of winning balls. Further, in the first jackpot specific effect, an effect in which the first character 351, the second character 352, and the third character 353 of the animation, and further the first background image 355 for the big hit is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. By the first character 351, the second character 352, and the third character 353, effects mainly for the purpose of boosting the jackpot gaming state are executed.

  The first big hit icon 301 is an icon displayed when the game is shifted to the big hit gaming state by the first big hit (6 rounds) shown in FIG. 3B. When shifting to the big hit gaming state by the second big hit (15 rounds) shown in FIG. 3B, the second big hit icon 302 (big hit icon 300) shown in FIG. 43 (A) is displayed. In the cumulative award ball number display area 400, the cumulative number of award balls in the consecutive villas is displayed. With the progress of the jackpot gaming state, the game balls were paid out by winning the game ball in the large winning opening (special variable winning ball device 7) or the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 50A and the second general winning opening 50B) As the number of winning balls increases, the cumulative number of winning balls displayed in the cumulative number of balls displaying area 400 also increases. In the cumulative award ball number display area 400 shown in FIG. 41 (B), “372” to be awarded is displayed.

  Further, while the predetermined effect and the big hit specific effect are being executed, a button icon 410 and a controller icon 420 are displayed at the lower left of the image display device 5. The button icon 410 is an icon imitating the push button 31B, and the controller icon 420 is an icon imitating the stick controller 31A. By displaying the button icon 410 and the stick controller 31A on the image display 5, the player is notified that the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is possible, and the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is displayed. I am urging the player.

  When the big hit gaming state ends, as shown in FIG. 41C, the image display device 5 displays an image by the ending effect. In the ending effect, an image in which the second character 352 bows is displayed. In addition, while the ending effect is being executed, the first predetermined effect is also executed, and the first jackpot icon 301 is displayed, and the cumulative award ball number is displayed in the cumulative award ball number display area 400. Even during the ending effect, a button icon 410 and a controller icon 420 are displayed at the lower left of the image display device 5. During the ending effect, the button icon 410 and the controller icon 420 may not be displayed. In addition, when the game ball reaches the general winning opening while the ending effect is being executed, the winning balls paid out by the winning of the game ball are not added to the total number of winning balls, but the ending effect is executed. When the game ball is won in the general winning opening during the game, the winning balls paid out by the winning of the game ball may be added to the total winning ball number.

  When the big hit gaming state ends, it shifts to the probability variation gaming state. During the probability variation gaming state, as shown in FIG. 41 (D), the first predetermined effect and the probability variation first specific effect are executed. In the first predetermined effect, as in the big hit gaming state, the first big hit icon 301 is displayed on the upper left of the image display device 5, and the cumulative award ball number display area 400 in the upper right of the image display device 5 The number is displayed.

  Further, during the probability variation gaming state, immediately below the first jackpot icon 301, a first past prize ball number display area 301A is provided. In the first past prize ball number display area 301A, the number of past prize balls in the big hit that triggered the display of the first big hit icon 301 is displayed. The first past prize ball number display area 301A is provided not only in the probability variation gaming state, but also in the second or subsequent jackpot gaming state in a row. Further, even while the predetermined effect and the probability variation effect are being executed, the button icon 410 and the controller icon 420 are displayed at the lower left of the image display device 5.

  As the big hit specific effect, a big hit first specific effect shown in FIG. 42 (A) and a big hit second specific effect shown in FIG. 42 (B) are provided. FIGS. 42A and 42B show an example in which the first predetermined effect is executed as the predetermined effect. As the predetermined effect, instead of the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect may be executed or the predetermined effect may not be executed.

  Part of the jackpot first specific effect shown in FIG. 42A is, for example, that the first character 351, the second character 352, and the third character 353 play an instrument or sing on the image display device 5, etc. Is displayed, and a predetermined big hit first background image 355 is displayed. Part of the jackpot second specific effect shown in FIG. 42B is, for example, an image in which the first character 351, the second character 352, and the third character 353 fly in the air is displayed on the image display device 5, It is an effect that a predetermined big hit second background image 360 is displayed.

  As the probability variation specific effect, there are provided a probability variation first specific effect shown in FIG. 42 (C) and a probability variation second specific effect shown in FIG. 42 (D). FIGS. 42C and 42D show an example in which the first predetermined effect is executed as the predetermined effect. As the predetermined effect, instead of the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect may be executed or the predetermined effect may not be executed.

  Part of the first variation of the first definite effect shown in FIG. 42C is, for example, an effect in which the second character 352 playing dance is largely displayed on the image display device 5 and the first variation background image 357 is displayed. . Part of the odd variation second background effect shown in FIG. 42D is an effect in which, for example, an image of a witch style second character 352 is displayed, and a predetermined odd variation second background image 358 is displayed.

  The big hit first specific effect shown in FIG. 42 (A) and the big hit second specific effect shown in FIG. 42 (B) can be switched by operating the stick controller 31A when the controller icon 420 is displayed. it can. Similarly, the positive variation 1 specific effect shown in FIG. 42C and the positive variation 2nd specific effect shown in FIG. 42D are switched by operating the stick controller 31A when the controller icon 420 is displayed. It is made possible.

  As the predetermined effect, a first predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (A) and a second predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (B) are provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 43 (C), an effect in which the predetermined effect is not performed is also provided. In FIGS. 43A to 43C, the jackpot first specific effect is executed. As the specific effect, in addition to the jackpot first specified effect, the jackpot second specified effect, the probability variation first specified effect, the probability variation second specified effect may be executed.

  The first predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (A) corresponds to the jackpot gaming state in which the accumulated award ball number display area 400 is provided at the upper right of the image display device 5 to display the accumulated award ball number. The first big hit icon 301 and the second big hit icon 302 are displayed side by side on the upper left of the image display device 5 and sequentially displayed. Hereinafter, the display in which the first big hit icon 301 and the second big hit icon 302 are arranged in parallel is also referred to as parallel display. In the first predetermined effect, the jackpot icon 300 is displayed in parallel the same number of times as the number of consecutive times.

  In the example shown in FIG. 43 (A), the present six consecutive villas are currently in use, and the past five jackpots in the consecutive villas are "first big hit" "first big hit" "second big hit" "second big hit" It is a "first big hit" and "a second big hit" is currently being executed. The number of consecutive houses is determined by the number obtained by adding the first big hit consecutive number count value and the second big hit consecutive number count value. The first big hit icon 301 and the second big hit icon 302 (big hit icon 300) increase in order according to the increase of the number of consecutive houses. During the continuous play, the big hit icon 300 starts to be displayed sequentially from the left end, and the big hit icon 300 is displayed in a horizontal row as the number of continuous actions increases. If five big hit icons are displayed in parallel in one row, the sixth and subsequent ones are displayed in a row in the lower row. Furthermore, the 11th and subsequent ones are displayed in a row in the lower row. Similarly, the jackpot icons 300 can be displayed with an upper limit of 50. The upper limit number may be less than 50 or more than 50. If the player has exceeded the upper limit for displaying the jackpot icon 300, display may be performed by another method. For example, as the number of consecutive houses increases, the upper limit number of big hit icons may be continuously displayed by deleting the old big hit icon or without displaying the new big hit icon, or the upper limit number is exceeded. The jackpots generated may be displayed collectively. For example, when the number of consecutive villas exceeds the predetermined number of consecutive villas, an icon dedicated to the predetermined number of consecutive villas may be displayed. For example, when the number of consecutive villas exceeds 10 consecutive villas, 10 You may make it display the big hit icon of the part beyond 10 consecutive villas by putting the icon for 10 consecutive villas which put together the consecutive villa minutes together. If the predetermined number of consecutive cottages is further exceeded, a plurality of icons may be displayed for the predetermined number of consecutive cottages. The icon for the predetermined number of consecutive houses may be a display for showing the number of the first big hit and the second big hit, or may be a display combining the first big hit and the second big hit. The icon for the predetermined number of consecutive cottages may be the same as or similar to the collective display 310 (see FIG. 43B) described next, or may be a different one without approximation to the collective display 310. .

  In the parallel display, when the game mode is newly switched to the big hit game state during the continuous play, the big hit icon 300 is additionally displayed on the right. When five big hit icons 300 are displayed in a row, a new big hit icon 300 at the lower end of the big hit icon 300 at the left end is displayed.

  In addition, below the first big hit icon 301 and the second big hit icon 302 corresponding to the past big hit gaming state in consecutive villas, the first past prize ball number display area 301A and the second past prize ball number display area 302A respectively Is provided. In the first past prize ball number display area 301A and the second past prize ball number display area 302A, the number of past prize balls corresponding to each big hit is displayed. The number of past prize balls is roughly similar depending on the type of big hit. For example, in the present embodiment, the first big hit is over 900, and the second big hit is over 2400, but the winnings beyond the upper limit winning number for the big winning opening (so-called over winning) and winning for general winning openings Because there is also, even the same type of big hit the number of past prize balls often fluctuate. Therefore, by displaying the number of past prize balls in the first past prize ball number display area 301A and the second past prize ball number display area 302A, it is possible to surely inform the player of the number of past prize balls. In particular, when the number of game balls awarded to the over winning and the general winning opening increases, the number of past winning balls also increases. In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of profit than usual, but by displaying the number of past award balls, it is possible to give the player a sense of profit more effectively.

  In the example shown in FIG. 43 (A), in the first past prize ball number display area 301A corresponding to the first big hit (first big hit), the number of past prize balls “924” and the second big hit (first big hit) In the corresponding first past prize ball number display area 301A, the past prize ball number "918", and in the second past prize ball number display area 302A corresponding to the third big hit (second big hit), the past prize ball number "2424", In the second past prize ball number display area 302A corresponding to the fourth big hit (second big hit), the past prize ball number "2418", the first past prize ball number display area corresponding to the fifth big hit (first big hit) The past prize ball number "936" is displayed on 301A. Further, in the cumulative winning balls number display area 400, the cumulative number “7620” of the number of past winning balls during these five big hits is displayed.

  The jackpot of the 6th run currently being executed is the second jackpot, and the second jackpot icon 302 corresponding to the second jackpot is displayed. Under the second jackpot icon 302, the second jackpot icon 302 is displayed. 2 The past prize ball number display area 302A is not displayed. As described above, the first past prize ball number display area 301A or the second past prize ball number display area 302A is provided under the first big hit icon 301 or the second big hit icon 302 in the past The first big hit icon 301 or the second big hit icon 302 corresponding to. The first past prize ball number display area 301A or the second past prize ball number display area 302A may be provided under the first big hit icon 301 or the second big hit icon 302 corresponding to the present big hit.

  In the second predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (B), a cumulative award ball number display area 400 is provided on the upper right of the image display device 5 to display the cumulative number of award balls, and the number of times of jackpot gaming state shifted during a series Is an effect of sequentially displaying “× N” (N is an integer) on the right of the first big hit icon 301 and the second big hit icon 302 on the lower right of the image display device 5. Hereinafter, “× N” is displayed on the right side of the first jackpot icon 301 and the second jackpot icon 302, and a display collectively showing the number of jackpot gaming states transferred during the series is also referred to as a batch display 310. In the second predetermined effect, the big hit icon 300 and the number of times the big hit gaming state is controlled is displayed together. “N” of “× N” displayed on the right of the first big hit icon 301 and the second big hit icon 302 can be determined based on the first big hit consecutive count count value and the second big hit consecutive count count value it can.

  When the collective display 310 is performed, the area displaying the cumulative number of past award ball numbers during the first jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the “first accumulated prize ball number”) directly below the number of consecutive villas on the right of the first jackpot icon 301 An area is provided immediately below the number of consecutive houses on the right side of the second big hit icon 302 and displays the cumulative number of past prize balls during the second big hit (hereinafter referred to as “second cumulative winning ball number”). The effect control board 12 calculates the first cumulative number of prize balls and the second cumulative number of prize balls from the number of balls in the past and the like during the series and displays them as a batch display 310.

  In collective display 310, compared with parallel display, the display area as a whole of the predetermined effect is smaller than parallel display, and the display position is specified in addition to the upper right corner (cumulative prize ball display area 400) similar to parallel display. It is only displayed at the lower right corner which is a position where it is difficult to inhibit the effect. For this reason, the collective display 310 is displayed in a mode that is less likely to inhibit the specific effect than the parallel display. In addition, since the numerical value of the side in which the big hit is not generated among the 1st big hit and the 2nd big hit is displayed as “0” when the big hit is once, the collective display 310 Although the display area is larger than the parallel display, the display area is smaller in the collective display 310 than in the parallel display when the big hit is two or more. When the big hit is once, the display area of the collective display 310 may be displayed smaller than the big hit icon 300. Alternatively, in the collective display 310, of the first big hit and the second big hit, only the big hit icon 300 (first big hit icon 301 or second big hit icon 302) corresponding to the big hit that occurred is displayed, The corresponding big hit icon may not be displayed.

  In addition, in the collective display 310, the icon corresponding to the current big hit, in this case, the number of consecutive houses for the second big hit icon 302 is not added (it remains "x 5"), but The icon corresponding to the jackpot, here the number of consecutive jacks of the second jackpot icon 302 may be incremented by 1, or in addition to the collective display 310, a jackpot icon corresponding to the current jackpot will be displayed on the upper left of the screen etc. May be

  In addition, an effect that does not display the predetermined effect is also provided. When the predetermined effect is not performed, as shown in FIG. 43C, the image display device 5 is in a state where the specific image, here the big hit first specific image, is displayed. Further, the case where the first predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (A) or the second predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (B) is being executed, or the predetermined effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 43 (C) However, the button icon 410 and the controller icon 420 are displayed on the image display device 5 together with the big hit first specific image.

  When the button icon 410 is displayed, the first predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (A), the second predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (B), and the effect that the predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (C) is not executed It is possible to switch by operating the push button 31B. For example, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), when the push button 31B is operated while the first predetermined effect is displayed on the image display device 5, the first predetermined effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 43 (B). 2 Switch to a predetermined effect. As shown in FIG. 43 (B), when the push button 31B is operated while the second predetermined effect is displayed on the image display 5, the second predetermined effect is changed as shown in FIG. 43 (C). It switches to the effect that an effect is not performed. As shown in FIG. 43 (C), when the push button 31B is operated while the effect that the predetermined effect is not displayed on the image display device 5 is operated, the first predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (A) Is displayed.

  In the gaming machine 1 having the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 43, the predetermined effect can be switched between the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect, and the non-predetermined effect by operating the push button 31B. . For this reason, with regard to the predetermined effect, since effects can be made according to the player's preference, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of interest.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 43A, the big hit icon 300 (the first big hit icon 301 and the second big hit icon 302) is displayed in parallel on the image display device 5 in the first predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with information such as the number of consecutive hits in the big hit and the number of past prize balls in the continuous feed. The jackpot number of times of jackpot is the number of times the jackpot is controlled to be in the jackpot gaming state during the jackpot.

  Moreover, the number of big hit icons 300 displayed on the image display device 5 increases as the number of consecutive residences increases. When the number of big hit icons 300 displayed on the image display device 5 increases, it is possible to make the player recognize that a large number of consecutive occurrences have occurred at a glance, so that a sense of superiority or uplifting given to the player It can enhance the feeling.

  On the other hand, when a large number of big hit icons 300 are displayed on the image display device 5, the display area of the specific effect executed on the image display device 5 becomes small. For example, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), when 10 consecutive units are generated and 10 large hit icons 300 are displayed, the display of the image display device 5 is eroded by the large hit icon 300 and the display area of the specific effect is It becomes smaller, and the big hit icon 300 hides the faces of the first character 351 and the second character 352 in the specific effect.

  As described above, when the display area of the specific effect is reduced by the screen of the image display device 5 being eroded by the big hit icon 300, the display of the specific effect for boosting the big hit gaming state is reduced. Therefore, for the player who wants to enjoy the specific effect, it is considered that the big hit icon 300 may feel in the way. In particular, in the example of FIG. 44A, for the player who wants to enjoy the expressions of the first character 351 and the second character 352 in the specific effect, the possibility of the jackpot icon 300 being felt in the way becomes high.

  In this respect, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), when the big hit icon 300 and the like are collectively displayed 310 with the predetermined effect as the second predetermined effect, the big hit icon 300 and the number of times of execution in the chain are displayed. The first cumulative total number of balls and the second cumulative total number of balls are displayed in the first total number of balls display area 301B and the second total number of balls display area 302B. As a result, since it is possible to reduce the display area while displaying the information on the big hit in the past, it is possible to display the specific effect on the wide area of the image display device 5. Therefore, the specific effect can be widely displayed, and the jackpot gaming state can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 43 (C), it is possible not to execute the predetermined effect in the image display device 5. When the predetermined effect is not performed in the image display device 5, the specific effect can be displayed in substantially the entire area of the image display device 5. Therefore, the specific effect can be displayed more widely, and the jackpot gaming state can be enhanced.

  When switching the predetermined effect, the player who wants to know the information related to the big hit in the series can display the first predetermined effect, and the player who wants to enjoy the specific effect can not display the predetermined effect. Since the display can be performed according to such a player's preference, it can contribute to the improvement of interest.

  Further, in the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect, the number of times the jackpot has been hit during the series is displayed. For this reason, the player can easily confirm the number of big hits in the consecutive villas, which can contribute to the improvement of interest.

  Further, in the second predetermined effect, the collective display 310 is displayed in an aspect at a position where it is difficult to inhibit the specific effect. Therefore, the player can change the mode to a mode that is less likely to inhibit the specific effect when displaying the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to produce effects tailored to the player's preferences and to contribute to the improvement of the game entertainment.

  Moreover, since the collective display 310 is displayed with a smaller area than the parallel display, it is difficult to inhibit the specific effect. In addition, since the collective display 310 is displayed in the upper left of the image display device 5 and in the lower right corner with respect to the display, the collective display 310 is displayed at a position where the specific effect is less likely to be disturbed than the parallel display. Therefore, it is possible to produce effects tailored to the player's preferences and to contribute to the improvement of the game entertainment.

  The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying the big hit icons 300 in parallel, and the second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying the collective display 310 in a mode in which the specific display is less likely to be covered than in the parallel display. Further, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be switched by the operation of the push button 31B, the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be adjusted to the preference of the player, which contributes to the improvement of the interest Can.

  In the first predetermined effect, the big hit icon 300 is displayed in parallel, and the ball number display area 300A in the past is provided directly under the big hit icon 300, and the big prize in the big hit that triggered the big hit icon 300 is displayed The number of balls is displayed. Further, in the second predetermined effect, the first cumulative hit ball number and the second cumulative winning ball number are displayed on the lower right sides of the first big hit icon 301 and the second big hit icon 302 on the collective display 310. Since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be switched by the operation of the push button 31B, the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be adjusted to the preference of the player, which can contribute to the improvement of interest .

  In addition, as a specific effect, the big hit specific effect has a big hit first specific effect shown in FIG. 42 (A) and a second specific effect shown in FIG. 42 (B), the probability change effect is shown in FIG. 42 (C) There are a definite variation 1st specific effect shown, and a definite variation 2nd specific effect shown in FIG. 42 (D). During the big hit gaming state, it is possible to switch between the big hit first specific effect and the big hit second specific effect, and during the probability variation gaming state, it is possible to switch between the probability variation first specific effect and the probability variation second specific effect. These specific effects can be switched by the operation of the stick controller 31A. Also, the predetermined effect can be switched by the operation of the push button 31B. As described above, even if the specific effect can be switched, the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be adjusted to the player's preference, which can contribute to the improvement of the interest.

  The specific effect can be switched by the operation of the stick controller 31A, and the predetermined effect can be switched by the operation of the push button 31B. As described above, since the specific effect can be switched by an operation different from the operation at the time of switching the predetermined effect, it is difficult to confuse the switching effect with the specific effect or the predetermined effect, and the specific effect is the predetermined effect It is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered by being blocked by the

  Hereinafter, modifications of the present invention will be described. In the following modification, a part or all of the contents already described in the above embodiment will be described again (in the same expression or a different expression as the above embodiment) or in the above embodiment. The description may be omitted for part or all of the content, or part or all of the content for which the description is omitted in the above embodiment may be described. Different names and symbols may be used for the same or similar objects.

  First, Modification 1 will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining notification effect. Here, in the present variation, the total number of gaming balls that can be acquired in one big hit is about 1,500. Specifically, in one round, there are 10 payouts for winning one game ball, and the round is continued until ten wins, so about 100 per round (10 × 10 = 100) game balls can be obtained. In addition, when the big hit continues, the value of the previous indication of the total number of acquisitions is inherited. FIG. 45 shows the case where the second and subsequent big hits have been executed.

  FIG. 45A is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect display device 9 in the first round during the big hit game when the big hit display result is obtained. In the first round, a rendering is performed in which the rendering state in the round can be selected from the two modes. On the left side of the screen of the effect display device 9, an A mode image 211 of a girl character is displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen of the effect display device 9, a B-mode image 212 of a boy character is displayed. The player selects one of the modes in accordance with the mode selection image 210 indicated by the left and right arrows prompting the player to perform the selection operation. At the start of the round, the A mode image 211 is selected as an initial value, and the left side of the mode selection image 210 is selected. The fact that these images have been selected can be known by blinking the images. It should be noted that the selected image may be surrounded by a thick frame instead of blinking, or any mode may be used if it is known that any mode is selected.

  The player can select one of the modes during a round. Such switching of the mode (effect state) can be changed by operating the stick controller 31A to the left and right. The left and right selections may be made changeable by operation means such as the cross key, or the mode may be switched by pressing the push button 31B. In addition, three or more types of effect modes may be provided, and the types of effect modes that can be selected for each number of big hits may be increased. In addition, the selection period of the mode may be a round other than one round, and the selection operation may be enabled only for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) in the round. In addition, a new effect mode may be set as an initial value (type of mode initially selected) for each big hit.

  FIGS. 45 (b) to 45 (d) are explanatory views showing the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the A mode is selected. FIGS. 45 (e) to 45 (g) are explanatory diagrams showing the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the B mode is selected. As shown in FIG. 45 (b), when the A mode is selected, a total display image 205 of the total number of game balls obtained by winning in the special winning opening is displayed at the upper left of the screen. The total acquisition number display image 205 increases each time the game ball wins the special winning opening. In FIG. 45 (b), it is shown that the total number of obtained game balls at the big hit is 2,000. In addition, the first notification image 204 is displayed at the center of the screen every time the number of gaming balls acquired by winning in the special winning opening exceeds a multiple of 500. In FIG. 45 (b), when the number of gaming balls exceeds 2000 which is four times 500, it is shown by the first notification image 204 that 2000 gaming balls have been acquired. In addition, the girl image 203 is displayed on the upper right of the screen. It is to be noted that the number displayed in the total acquisition number display image 205 and the number displayed as the first notification image 204 indicate the same display at an instantaneous timing. In addition, when the total number of acquisitions is not a good number with a break (for example, when increasing by 13 each), the number displayed in the total display number display image 205 and the number displayed as the first notification image 204 are different ( In some cases, the number displayed in the acquired total number display image 205 is 2013, the number displayed as the first notification image 204 is 2000, and the like.

  FIG. 45C shows the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the total number of game balls acquired in the same big hit as FIG. 45B is 2500. As shown in FIG. 45 (c), the total acquisition number display image 205 indicates that the total acquisition number of gaming balls is 2,500. In addition, when the number of game balls exceeds 2500, which is five times 500, the first notification image 204 indicates that 2500 game balls have been acquired. Also, the girl image 203 is displayed by a person different from that in the case of FIG. 45 (b). Furthermore, in the fourth big hit, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is as shown in FIG. 45 (d). In FIG. 45 (d), it is shown that the acquired total number display image 205 is 5000 pieces. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 5000, which is 10 times 500, the first notification image 204 shows that 5000 game balls have been acquired. Also, the girl image 203 is displayed by a person different from that in the case of FIG. 45 (b) or 45 (c). As described above, when the number of game balls exceeds a multiple of 500, the girl image 203 also changes along with the first notification image 204. Here, the first notification image 204 and the girl image 203 are continuously displayed until the next first notification image 204 and the girl image 203 are changed. However, the first notification image 204 and the girl image 203 may be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Next, the case where the B mode is selected in FIG. 45 (a) will be described. As shown in FIG. 45 (e), when the B mode is selected, a total display image 215 of the total number of game balls obtained by winning in the special winning opening is displayed at the upper left of the screen. The total acquisition number display image 215 increases each time the game ball wins the special winning opening. Here, the display mode of characters is different between the acquisition total number display image 215 in the B mode and the acquisition total number display image 205 in the A mode. As described above, the display of the total number of acquisitions is made different depending on the effect mode, but the display of the total number of acquisitions may be the same regardless of the mode. In FIG. 45 (e), it is shown that the total number of obtained game balls at the big hit is 2,000. In addition, a boy image 213 is displayed on the upper right of the screen. In the B mode, such an effect by the boy image 213 is executed. However, unlike the A mode, in the B mode, even if the total number of obtained game balls exceeds 2000, the effect of notifying the total number of game balls obtained at the center of the screen is not executed. In FIG. 45 (e), another effect image may be displayed without displaying the boy image 213.

  FIG. 45 (f) shows the display screen of the effect display 9 when the total number of game balls acquired in the same big hit as in FIG. 45 (e) is 2500. As shown in FIG. 45 (f), it is shown by the total acquisition number display image 215 that the total acquisition number of gaming balls is 2,500. In addition, when the number of game balls exceeds 2500, the second notification image 214 indicates that 2500 game balls have been acquired. In the B mode, a second notification image 214 is displayed at the center of the screen each time the number of gaming balls acquired by winning in the winning opening exceeds a multiple of 2500. In (f) of FIG. 45, when the number of gaming balls exceeds 2500 which is 1 × 2500, the second notification image 214 indicates that 2500 gaming balls have been acquired. The second notification image 214 is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 2 seconds have passed since it was displayed).

  Furthermore, in the fourth big hit, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is as shown in FIG. In FIG. 45 (g), it is shown that the acquired total number display image 215 is 5000 pieces. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 5000, which is twice twice 2500, the second notification image 214 shows that 5000 game balls have been acquired. Here, in the B mode, the boy image 213 does not change the character as in the A mode, and an image of the same person is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 45, when it is controlled to the A mode, a notification effect by having acquired the gaming ball is executed by the first notification image 204. In addition, when being controlled to B mode, with the 2nd information picture 214, the information production with the fact that game sphere is acquired is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round) by the notification effect depending on whether the effect state is the A mode or the B mode.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 45 (b) to 45 (d), whenever the total number of game balls acquired exceeds a multiple of 500, a notification effect by the game ball being acquired by the first notification image 204 is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 45 (e) to 45 (g), whenever the total number of game balls acquired exceeds a multiple of 2500, a notification effect by the game ball being acquired by the second notification image 214 is executed. Therefore, by making the notification effects diversified, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round).

  In addition, as shown in the total acquisition number display image 205 of A mode and the acquisition total number display image 215 of B mode in FIG. A display is made with the sphere increasing by 10 each. Therefore, since the number of granted game balls can be variably displayed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round) by changing the display of the total number acquired.

  In addition, a mode selection image 210 for selecting whether to set to A mode or B mode during the round is displayed. Therefore, since it becomes possible to select the presentation state in the round, the interest of the game during the big hit (in the round) can be improved.

  Next, Modification 2 will be described. In the modification 2, in the embodiment shown above, it is comprised so that a display of a coupled ratio and a duty ratio may be performed. In the second modification, the gaming machine 1 includes two start winning openings, two special symbol display devices 8AX and 8BX, and four general winning openings. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present modification 2, in the gaming control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31, each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general) The number of game ball entry into the winning opening, hereinafter also referred to as "the entry area", is performed. Further, in the gaming machine 1, information such as the ratio and the ratio can be displayed on the display monitor 29 shown in FIGS. 46 and 47 provided on the main substrate 31.

  On the gaming machine maker side, it is usual to design the game board surface (to pass the test) so that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency. Further, when conducting the test, it is confirmed at a predetermined frequency whether game media has entered the general winning area. Furthermore, even after the game machine is installed, it is confirmed as to what adjustments have been made and, as a result of the adjustment, whether game media has entered the general winning area with a frequency as designed. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the second modification, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made in the gaming machine having the general winning area. Hereinafter, the display of the character ratio and the like will be described. Hereinafter, the counting of the game balls on the main substrate 31 and the display of the feature ratio etc. will be described.

  The main substrate 31 shown in FIG. 46 is a substrate that performs control relating to the game in the second modification. The main substrate 31 is enclosed in a substrate case 201 (corresponding to the substrate storage case 200) as shown in FIG. 48, and as shown in FIG. For example, 7 segments are arranged. The display monitor 29 is disposed in front of the main substrate 31 when it is viewed. Since the main substrate 31 can not be viewed in the state where the glass door frame is not opened, the front when viewing the main substrate 31 is the front when viewing the back side of the game board in the state where the glass door frame is opened. And is different from the front of the gaming machine 1. However, the front when the main substrate 31 is viewed may be the same as the front of the gaming machine 1.

  The main board 31 has information on game winnings, for example, the number of winning balls by winning in the first starting opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the big winning opening ( The total number of prize balls and prize balls by winning in the attacker) is entered and counted up, and the display monitor 29 is a series of winning balls which is a ratio of the number of prize balls by winning in the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. Part ratio (%) which is the ratio of the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew) and the number of winning balls by winning in the big winning opening (attacker) in the total number of winning balls ) Is to be displayed. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls (following winning character winning balls) to the large winning opening (attacker) in the total number of winning balls. The winning combination is the number of winning balls from the second starting winning opening (electric chew) in the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls from the winning on the large winning opening (attacker) (number of balls for winning the following items) Is the proportion of The total number of winning balls (total winning ball number below) is the number of winning balls by winning in the big winning opening (attacker), the number of winning balls by winning in the second start winning opening (electric chew), and the big winning opening (Attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) It is the total of the winning balls number by winning in winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening). Note that the special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable features, and by the variation of the passable width of the gaming ball, the winning probability ratio of the gaming ball fluctuates. is there. In addition, the winning opening (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) is a fixed winning combination, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected winning percentage of the game ball is a fixed feature.

  As a method of tallying and calculating information on winnings in games, winning balls by winning to the first starting opening (Heso) and general winning opening (sode) in 6000 winning balls (general winning balls), No. 1 (2) The number of regular electric circuit prize balls (number of electric chow balls) which is the number of prize balls obtained by winning in the start winning opening (electric chew), and the special electric pole prize which is the number of winning balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) Count the number of balls (attacker prize ball number). The total is regarded as one set, and 10 sets, that is, a ratio (%) for 60000, and a ratio (%) are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls number) by winning in the 1st starting opening (Heso) and general winning opening (Sode) to be counted, general electric service prize electric ball number (electric chew award electric ball number), special electric duty The number of winning balls (the number of attackers) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated every set. Furthermore, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of storage for 11 sets of 6000 sets is stored, and it is possible to calculate a running ratio (%) and a playing ratio (%) of the total of them.

  The display monitor 29 switches and displays the ratio (%), the ratio (%), the ratio (%) of the cumulative total ratio, and the ratio (%) for every 6,000 pieces for every predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) be able to. That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display everything, but the number of prize balls from the winning on the first starting hole (Heso) and the winning on the second starting winning hole (electric chew) are counted up as the game progresses The number of prize balls due to the change in the number of prize balls due to the prize winnings on the large winning opening (attacker) will change. If, for example, the number of winning balls won after displaying a ratio of 6,000 (%) is reflected in the ratio (%) of 6,000 displayed after, then 6,000 Discrepancies may occur between the coupling ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) of 6,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of winning balls by winning in the first starting opening (Heso), the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of winning balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker), total winning balls Such a discrepancy can be prevented if the number is input and the tabulation is performed at a predetermined timing (for example, a display timing of a continuous ratio (%) for 6000) in the switching display.

As an example of calculation method below, the total number of winning balls is 60000, and the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric Chu) and winning balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) The method of calculating the item ratio (combination ratio (%)) in the case where the character acquisition ball number which is the total is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total winning ball number refers to the total cumulative number of gaming media (winning balls) paid out from the gaming machine. In addition, the bonus game acquisition ball number refers to the total number of game media paid out by the game media winning in the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the continuous winning thing winning ball number refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out by the game media winning the attacker. Therefore, the coupling ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the duty ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2).
Reciprocal ratio = [continuous character acquisition ball number / total acquisition number] x 100 (1)
Role ratio = [(continuous character acquisition ball number + character acquisition ball number) / total acquisition number] × 100 ... (2)

  In the case where the total number of winning balls is 60000 and the number of winning balls is 42000, the character ratio can be obtained by dividing 42000 by 60000 as 0.70 decimal places and discarding three digits. However, since the microcomputer used for the gaming machine can not perform the operation after the decimal point, the operation according to the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of balls obtained by the bonus is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. And this 4200000 is divided by 60000. This gives 70 as the quotient. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is calculated as 70%. In other words, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, in order to obtain an operation result up to three decimal places, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of winning balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. And divide 42000 by 600. This gives 70 as the quotient. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, calculation results up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, in order to obtain an operation result up to three decimal places, division by 1000 may be performed.

  In this example, although the total number of winning balls is 60000, a 3-byte area is provided as a region for storing the total number of winning balls in order to calculate the feature ratio of a long period. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA 60h in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A 410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the bonus item acquisition ball number as well.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform calculations between values of up to 2 bytes. Thus, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method will be described in which the second calculation method is simplified. In the third calculation method, 60h of the lower 1 byte is rounded off for 00EA 60h of the total number of winning balls so that calculation with a microcomputer used for a game machine is easy, and the total number of winning balls is 00EAh, that is, decimal Calculate 234 by notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is discarded, and the character acquisition ball number 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation is calculated.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. Based on 78 determined here, the character ratio is determined as 78%.

  While the third calculation method facilitates calculation with a microcomputer used in a game machine, an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error is + 1% when the total number of winning balls and the number of obtained balls are 10 times. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the feature ratio is extended, and approximates to the original value.

  Further, the substrate case 201 is formed of a translucent material so that the main substrate 31 and the display monitor 29 can be viewed. The substrate case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main substrate 31 is inserted, and a heat radiation hole for releasing the heat of the electrical component of the main substrate 31. The display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 31 is disposed at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. For this reason, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not blocked by the heat radiation holes. Here, “directly on the front” means directly on the main substrate 31 as a viewpoint, and means between the employee or the like who is trying to visually recognize the main substrate 31 and the main substrate 31.

  Further, the substrate case 201 is provided with a seal for displaying the type, model, specification and the like of the main substrate 31. These holes, heat radiation holes, and seals are disposed so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, when the display monitor 29 is disposed in a first portion of the main substrate 31 (for example, the central portion of the main substrate 31), a second different from the first portion of the main substrate 31 Alternatively, other electrical components may be arranged in a portion (e.g., the peripheral portion of the main substrate 31), and holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals may be arranged in the portion of the substrate case corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 31. Good. In particular, in order to release the heat generated by the display monitor 29, it is preferable to provide the heat dissipation holes in the vicinity of the display monitor 29. Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat radiation holes be disposed at positions not directly in front of the display monitor 29. According to this, since the display monitor 29 does not interfere with the visibility, it is easy to confirm the information on the winning.

  Further, it is preferable that the wiring does not overlap the portion of the substrate case 201 corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 31. Specifically, the portion of the board case 201 corresponding to the second portion of the main board 31 does not overlap the hole to which one connector of the wiring is connected and the connection destination to which the other connector of the wiring is connected. Make it According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 from being disturbed by the wiring.

  In addition, although the main board 31 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the gaming machine, the main board 31 may be separated by a predetermined distance or other electronic components to avoid misidentification with the 7 segments of the display monitor 29 It is preferable to arrange it by sandwiching. The other electronic components referred to here are desirably, for example, large control components such as a CPU.

  In addition, a storage area where information on game winnings is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (sum of information on game winnings stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters of maximum 2 bytes), prize balls The total number buffer is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be stored continuously. The ring buffer will be further described later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, or the value of the bonus ball acquisition ball number is larger than the stored value of the total ball number, or the character Initialization of the storage area where information on winning of the game is stored when an event that can not occur as a situation is detected, for example, when the value of the continuous winning object winning ball number is larger than the value of the winning ball number You may process. In addition, an error display or a warning display may be performed without performing the initialization processing, or the error processing or the warning display may be performed, or the initialization processing may be performed after the error display or the warning display. The error display and the warning display will be further described later.

  In the calculation of the duty ratio (%), for example, assuming that the total number of obtained balls is 34,321 and the number of obtained balls is 19876, the ratio is calculated by dividing 34,321 against 19876 as a divisor. 19876/34321 = 0.57912 and so on, which is calculated to be about 57.9% of the part ratio (%). In the case of performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 560, calculation with decimal points must be avoided, so the following calculation formula is used. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34,321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded off, resulting in 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the decimal part is rounded off, it is calculated to be 57% of the part ratio (%) and displayed on the display monitor 29. In this case, the value calculated by the correct calculation is an error on the display There will be no

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the largest error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of obtained objects are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when converted to the calculation by the game control microcomputer 560, 32799/327 = 100.3% results in a + 0.3% error. For example, when the decimal point is rounded down and the calculation is performed, the correct value is 69.9%, and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%. Although an error of% is considered to be displayed, a ratio (%) (or a coupled ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error even on the display of an error of 1%.

  Further, in the case of using the above calculation method, since the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, the calculation can not be performed when the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Furthermore, the error is gradually increased when it is less than 32768. If it is less than 10000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in an even larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of balls acquired, the larger the error. For this reason, the display ratio (%) and the link ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired spheres (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by a counter. Even when the display is performed, it may be notified that there is a possibility that the error may be large, by emitting light of a dedicated lamp, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  Further, the display monitor 29 displays the ratio (%) and the ratio (%) on seven segments, and switches and displays each value every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). In this case, for example, while displaying the duty ratio (%) for 30 seconds, a phenomenon occurs that a game medium is newly awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the ratio calculated according to it is reciprocated after 30 seconds ( If it is displayed as a value of%), there is a possibility that the values of the duty ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) may deviate. For this reason, it is preferable to sequentially display values calculated and calculated within the same interrupt as the duty ratio (%) and the coupling ratio (%).

  Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when 2 segments are provided), the display can not be made 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. Although the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 47 can display numerical values in the lower two digits, even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under specific conditions, numerical values may be displayed in part of the upper two digits.

  In the above calculation method, an example is shown in which the total number of balls acquired, the number of balls acquired as a feature, and the number of balls obtained as a continuous combination are counted in the counter. A sensor is provided to detect that the game medium has won, and the number of winning balls is individually counted based on the detection result, and then a counter of winning balls and a counter of continuous winning balls. You may calculate the value to be aggregated. In addition, based on the detection result, a sensor provided separately for the attacker and a sensor provided after the discharge path for discharging the gaming medium for which the attacker has won and the gaming medium for which the electric Chu has won are combined are used. It is also possible to calculate a value to be added to the character acquisition ball number counter and the continuous character acquisition ball number counter. The display of the duty ratio will be specifically described below. In the following specific example, an example will be described where it is detected that the game medium has won by the sensors provided for each of the attacker and the electric chew, and the numbers of winning balls are individually counted based on the detection results.

  As shown in FIG. 46, a display monitor 29 is connected to the main substrate 31 in the gaming machine 1. In the gaming machine 1, the main substrate 31 is provided on the back side of the gaming board provided in the gaming machine frame 30, as shown in FIG. On the back side of the game board, in addition to the main board 31, peripheral boards such as a production control board 80, a voice control board 70X, a lamp control board 35X, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a launch control board are also provided. . The main substrate 31 is disposed at a position not overlapping the peripheral substrates other than the main substrate 31. Main substrate 31 may overlap with these peripheral substrates. In particular, the main substrates 31 may overlap so as to be above the peripheral substrates.

  The RAM 55 of the main board 31 includes a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, and a second general winning number counter, A third general winning number counter, a fourth general winning number counter, and a large winning number counter are provided.

  The first gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first gate switch 17A. The second gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 17B. The first starting winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. The second starting winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second starting opening switch 22B.

  The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 24A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 24B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 24C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. The large winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of the game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  Further, a clear switch is connected to the main board 31. The clear switch is arranged at a position where employees and the like can not easily operate on the back side of the game board. By operating the clear switch, the data used for the ratio and the duty ratio stored in the RAM 55 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch operated when the calculation of the ratio or the ratio can not be reperformed, for example, when there is a failure in the calculation of the ratio or the ratio. For this reason, it is a switch which does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal coupling ratio and a combination ratio. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is sent to the main board 31 in addition to the data clear.

  Further, an RTC 506 is provided on the main substrate 31. The main board 31 can detect the current time by the RTC 506. The RTC 506 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by performing initial setting, but in the second modification, the RTC 506 can measure the business hours of the game arcade.

  The main substrate 31 is accommodated in the substrate case 201 as shown in FIG. A caulking pin 31 B is attached to the substrate case 201. By providing the caulking pins 31 B, the main substrate 31 is completely sealed in the substrate case 201, and an illegal act on the main substrate 31 is prevented. The substrate case 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”).

  Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main substrate 31. In addition, a sealing seal 31S is attached to the substrate case 201 for proving that the main substrate 31 is sealed. The sealing seal 31S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 201. The sealing seal 31S is disposed at a position away from the main substrate 31, and is disposed at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is interrupted, such as the front of the display monitor 29. Thus, the display monitor 29 is disposed at a position not hidden by the seal seal 31S.

  The display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, and a fourth display unit 29D. Each of the first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D is configured by seven segments each including seven segments that draw the character of "8" and dots disposed at the lower right of the seven segments. The first display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, and white. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in an extremely short cycle.

  The display monitor 29 displays items of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. The aggregation period is displayed on the upper two-digit first display 29A and the second display 29B, and numerical values are displayed as percentages on the lower two-digit third display 29C and fourth display 29D. In the display No. 1, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the short-term duty ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the running ratio of the total cumulative total is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the ratio of the total cumulative running total is displayed.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (the number of acquired balls) is 60000. The period for which the total total is to be calculated means a total period after starting calculation of the ratio, combination ratio, or total ratio after resetting the calculation of the combination ratio or ratio once.

  In the above-mentioned example, although a continuation ratio and a part ratio are calculated irrespective of a game state, it may be calculated in consideration of a game state. For example, the ratio may be a ratio of the number of winning balls by winning to the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state in the total number of winning balls. In addition, the winning combination, the winning total number of balls, the winning combination of the total number of winning balls, the number of winning balls by winning a second starting winning opening during high base state and the big winning opening during the big hit gaming state It may be a ratio of the number of winning balls by

  When the short-term link ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the first “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. In addition, when the short-term linkage ratio of display No1 is displayed, the short-term linkage ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and the short-term part ratio of display No2 is displayed In the case of being displayed, the short-term ratio is displayed in percentage (in%) on the first display 29A and the second display 29B.

  When the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and when the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. Further, when the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative link ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. When the ratio is displayed, the total display combination ratio is displayed in percentage (in%) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D.

  The main substrate 31 has the number of game balls entering into the fourth general winning opening from the first general winning opening, the first starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening when calculating the ratio and the winning ratio. We are tabulating. In the main processing, the CPU 56 performs the first gate switch 17A and the second gate switch 17B, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general in the main processing. A state confirmation process is performed to confirm the state (presence or absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the winning opening switch 24D.

  In the state confirmation process of each switch, it is specified to which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the first gate switch 17A and the second gate switch 17B, the values of the first gate passage number counter and the second gate passage number counter are added, and the first starting port switch 22A, When the detection signal is output from the second starting opening switch 22B, the values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, When the value of the large winning number counter is added and a detection signal is output from the first general winning opening switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D The value of the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, the third general winning number counter, the fourth general winning number counter is added to each entry area Aggregate entering the number of tricks cells (winning number of game balls to each of the winning openings). The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 55.

  As described above, the steps for totaling the number of game balls entering each entry area are executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (included in the switch state confirmation process) Therefore, it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without executing a separate counting program, that is, without causing a problem of lack of capacity due to an increase in the execution program. .

  The CPU 56 of the main substrate 31 calculates the number of winning balls by the winning of each winning opening based on the counted number of gaming balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 55 for each winning opening. Let The number of winning balls by the winning of the gaming balls is calculated by multiplying the number of gaming balls paid out by one winning for the winning opening and the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of winning balls by the winning of the gaming balls is predetermined for each winning opening.

  The number of winning balls for each winning opening classified here is, as shown in FIG. 49, a general winning opening winning ball (a winning ball for winning a first general winning opening to a fourth general winning opening (Sode)), 1st start winning a prize winning ball (a winning ball by the winning a prize to the first starting winning a prize mouth (heso)), a regular electric circuit winning a prize ball (a winning a prize ball by a winning a prize to a electric chew) The number of balls awarded by The RAM 55 also stores the total number of winning balls. In addition, although the number of game ball prizes to the general winning hole and the number of game ball prizes to the first starting hole are separately counted in the CPU 56, the number of game ball winnings to the general winning hole and the first starting hole The number of winning game balls may be collected and counted. Also, although the number of prize balls for the general winning prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first starting mouth ball are calculated separately, the number of prize balls for the general winning mouth ball and the number of first winning mouth balls The number of winning balls may be collectively calculated.

  The RAM 55 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing these winning balls. The ring buffer is provided with ten first to tenth storage areas consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter storing the number of prize balls obtained by winning into each winning opening for every 6,000 number of prize balls. Thus, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer is provided with a 0-th storage area consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter storing the number of winning balls by winning on each winning opening for every 6,000 winning balls. The number of winning balls for each winning opening, which increases with the progress of the game, is added to the zeroth storage area. Eleven storage areas of the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store data of 256 × 256 = 65536, and up to 6000 data can be stored with room.

  In addition, the RAM 55 is provided with a storage area for the total sum and the total sum of the number of winning balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first to tenth storage areas for each winning opening. The storage area for 10 sets of totals and total totals is configured with a maximum of 3 bytes of counter, so it can store 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data, and up to 60000 data will be free. It can be stored.

  Further, the RAM 55 is provided with a continuous ratio storage area for storing a ratio of 10 sets and a total cumulative total ratio and a continuous ratio. The CPU 56 of the main board 31 calculates the winning combination and combination ratio of 10 sets and total cumulative total by the number of winning balls based on the number of winning game balls to 10 sets and total cumulative total winning openings, and 10 sets equivalent And the total ratio of the total and the ratio are stored in a ratio storage area storing the ratio. The combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and combination ratio of 10 sets and the total accumulation is all configured by a counter of up to 1 byte. For example, in the case of storing in integers, the roles and ratio of 10 sets and the total total can be stored with a maximum of 1 byte counter with allowance.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 56 of the main board 31 will be described. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 56 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in register, the ROM 54, the RAM 55, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 50, the address / data signal line of the ROM 54 is a ROM area of the memory space (in the second modification, 0000H to 2FFFH (H represents a hexadecimal number. The same applies hereinafter) And 0000H to 2FBFH, and 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 56 specifies this ROM area and reads data from the ROM 54. Further, in the second modification, the ROM area is divided into eight areas of the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  Further, the address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the second modification) of the memory space, and the CPU 56 reads data from the built-in register and registers via this register area. Write data to

  Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 55 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in the second modification) of the memory space, and the CPU 56 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 55 or to the RAM 55. Write data. The other areas of the memory space (in the second modification, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC 0H to FFFFH) are non-use areas.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 51, the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 55 (the 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH in this second modification) is a RAM control area, a nonuse area, a RAM data area, and other areas. It is configured. The storage area of the RAM 55 corresponding to the RAM control area includes instruction data (op code) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 56 and supplemental data (operands) necessary for the CPU 56 to execute each instruction. Data for the configured control program (sometimes referred to simply as control program data) is temporarily stored, and in the storage area of the RAM 55 corresponding to the RAM data area, reference data referred to by the control program (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) are temporarily stored.

  Further, in the storage area of the RAM 55 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 55 corresponding to the other area, data used for displaying the coupling ratio and the duty ratio is temporarily stored. For example, the storage area of the RAM 55 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total cumulative total of the number of winning balls for each winning opening and a continuous ratio combination storage area for the total total. In the storage area of the RAM 55 corresponding to the other area, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of winning balls per winning opening (10 sets A storage area for the sum of minutes) and a continuous ratio storage area for 10 sets are provided. In the storage area of the RAM 55 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 55 corresponding to the other area, data in which the start addresses of the subroutines are different from each other is stored.

  In the second modification, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 55 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each data described above (instruction data, supplementary data, reference) If the data (management data) is data of the number of bytes (for example, 2 bytes) exceeding 1 byte, it is divided for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 55 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. I remember.

  Further, the main substrate 31 controls the display monitor 29 to display the ratio and ratio. Here, the main substrate 31 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 52A is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the character ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 52A, when the display on the display monitor 29 is started, first, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the short-term continuous ratio display of display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 52 (B-1), the character "y" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and the character "6." is displayed on the second display portion 29B. Is displayed. In addition, the short-term continuity ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "1." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

  When the display No. 1 is continued for 30 seconds, the short-term duty ratio No. 2 is displayed. The display of short-term duty ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 52 (B-2), in the display of the short-term part ratio of display No. 2, the character of "y" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and the character of "7." is displayed on the second display portion 29B. Is displayed. In addition, the short-term winning ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term winning ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "3." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

  When the display of display No 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative link ratio of display No 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 52 (B-3), the character "A" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and the character "6." is displayed on the second display portion 29B. Is displayed. In addition, the total cumulative link ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, if the total cumulative link ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

  When the display No. 3 is continued for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative duty ratio of display No 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total-cum-cum-combination ratio of display No 4, as shown in FIG. 52 (B-4), the character "A" is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display portion 29B. Is displayed. In addition, the total cumulative winning combination is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the total cumulative winning ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D.

  When the display No. 4 is continued for 30 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 52 (B-5). Thereafter, the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term link ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the total of the combination of short-term combination of display No. 2 to display No. 4 is red. As described above, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation continuous ratio, and the total-cum-combination ratio every 30 seconds.

  In the main substrate 31, when the total prize sphere of the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the storage of the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage of the storage area of the sum total and the total accumulation for 10 sets, the combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio of the 10 sets and the total accumulation, and the transmission ratio is respectively updated.

  In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. In addition, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the number of prize balls of the general prize winning prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is “27” “81” “120” “120” “36” “225” “87” “66” “117” “45” “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6,000, the number of prize balls of the general prize winning prize balls in the 1st to 10th storage areas is “27”, “81” “ Update to 120 "36" 225 "87" 66 "117" 45 "21". Further, the number of winning balls in the 0 th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of winning balls in the 10 th storage area is erased.

  When the number of winning balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area is updated, the stored number of winning balls may be once erased and then a new number of winning balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new winning number may be stored by overwriting the stored winning number.

  Also, the abnormality detection sensor group 226 shown in FIG. 46 includes a door open sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame. The opening of the glass door frame does not correspond to abnormality when the employee performs, but often corresponds to abnormality when the person other than the employee performs. Therefore, in the second modification, a door opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame is included in the abnormality detection sensor group 226. The door open sensor transmits an open signal to the main substrate 31 when detecting the opening of the glass door frame.

  Door opening includes opening a normal glass door frame by an employee and opening an abnormal glass door frame by a person other than the employee. Here, detection of door opening is performed on the assumption of abnormal opening of the glass door frame. In addition, even if the employee opens the glass door frame normally but the door opening is detected even if it is the opening of the normal glass door frame, the employee etc. often recognize the opening of the glass door frame, Special problems can be avoided.

  Subsequently, control relating to the display of the ratio ration ratio performed by the main substrate 31 will be described. In the main substrate 31, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 560 is activated, and the CPU 56 executes predetermined processing to be the game control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initialization, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 55 are cleared. Therefore, when the power supply from the power supply substrate is started, the data used for displaying the coupling ratio and the duty ratio stored in the non-use area and the other area of the RAM 55 is maintained without being cleared. The data used to display the ratio and ratio stored in the non-use area and the other area of the RAM 55 is cleared by operating the clear switch. Further, the register setting of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 is performed. After initialization, the CPU 56 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. The ratio / combination ratio related processing is executed by this timer interrupt processing.

  FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing a procedure of coupled ratio / combination ratio related processing. In the main substrate 31, as shown in FIG. 54, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation has been detected in the coupled ratio / combination ratio related process (step S151). Whether or not the abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not the clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch.

  As a result, when the clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S151; YES), a warning display preparation is performed (step S152), and the process proceeds to step S153. Further, when the clear switch operation signal is not transmitted and the abnormal operation is not detected (step S151; NO), the winning information is acquired (step S103). In the winning information, the gaming ball is detected by any of the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first general winning opening switch 24A to the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. Acquired by

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the current time is within business hours (step S154). The RTC 506 measures and determines whether the current time is within business hours. As a result, if the current time is within business hours (step S154; YES), it is determined whether the glass door frame is closed (step S155). Whether or not the glass door frame is closed is determined by whether or not an open signal is transmitted from the door open sensor.

  As a result, when the opening signal is not output from the door opening sensor, and the glass door frame is closed (step S155; YES), the gaming ball has won a predetermined number of balls or more in the attacker per unit time. It is determined whether or not there is (step S156). The unit time and the predetermined number of balls here are set to values that assume a state in which a player can not win in a normal game. Specifically, since the firing of the game balls is 100 shots for a maximum of 1 minute, for example, it can be appropriately determined with an upper limit of 100 per minute. More specifically, the predetermined number of balls is five when the unit time is one second, or thirty when the unit time is 10 seconds. The unit time is measured by the RTC 506. In addition, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of detected game balls by the count switch 23.

  As a result, when the game ball has not won a predetermined number of balls or more in the attacker per unit time (step S156; NO), the number of balls added is added according to the winning information obtained in step S153. A process is performed (step S157). In addition, a prize ball number addition process is performed when warning display preparation is not performed. Here, when the warning display preparation is performed, the ratio relation / combination ratio related processing is ended as it is. In the prize ball number addition process, the general prize winning opening (Sode), the general prize winning opening (Heso), the general electric utility prize ball (electric chow), and the special electric symbol prize ball (attacker) in the 0th memory area shown in FIG. Each prize ball number is added.

  In addition, in the prize ball number addition processing, the general winning opening (Sode), the general winning opening (Heso), the ordinary electric service winning ball (electric chow), the special electric symbol winning ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer Calculate the total number of balls for each number of balls. Here, when the total prize sphere of the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is stored in the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Move it. In addition, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. In addition, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is erased.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has timed out (calculation timer = 0) (step S158). As a result, if the calculation timer has not timed out (step S108; NO), the consecutive ratio / combination ratio related processing is ended as it is. If the calculation timer is up (step S158; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer = 2000 ms) (step S159).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) obtained by adding in step S157 is the calculated number (step S160). The calculation execution number can be an appropriate number, and for example, a reference for moving the numerical values stored in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area in the ring buffer to the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area, respectively. The total number of winning balls can be slightly less than 6000, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the calculation execution number be a number slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum payout number of balls from 6,000.

  As a result, when the number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) is not the calculated number (step S160; NO), the consecutive ratio / combination ratio related process is finished. If the number of winning balls has been calculated and executed (step S160; YES), the consecutive ratio and the winning ratio are calculated (step S161). Here, the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio (total cumulative connection ratio), and the cumulative combination ratio (total cumulative combination ratio) are respectively calculated. For this reason, the short-term linkage ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio are all calculated within the same interrupt. Thereafter, a ratio / combination ratio display process is performed (step S162), and the combination ratio / combination ratio related process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S154 that it is not within business hours (step S154; NO), and if it is determined in step S155 that the door frame is not closed (step S155; NO), an attacker may be asked per unit time in step S156 If it is determined that the gaming ball has won the predetermined number of balls or more (step S156; YES), error display preparation is performed (step S163). After that, the ratio / combination ratio related processing ends.

  Next, the combination ratio / combination ratio display control process will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing a procedure of coupled ratio / combination ratio display control processing. As shown in FIG. 55, in the process for control of ratio display / combination ratio, it is determined whether preparation for display of combination ratio / combination ratio has been completed (step S 381). If it is determined that the consecutive ratio / combination ratio display preparation processing has not been completed (step S 381; NO), it is determined whether or not the error display preparation is completed (step S 382).

  As a result, when it is determined that the error display preparation is completed (step S382; YES), the error display is performed (step S383). Error display can be performed as appropriate. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29, and “0” and “1” can be displayed in the lower two digits. Further, when an error display is performed, a predetermined error display may be performed on the second special symbol display device 8BX or the like on another display device, for example, the image display device 9X or the first special symbol display device 8AX. The effect lamp 28X may be turned on or off in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speaker 27. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the gaming machine provided on the main substrate 31. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

  When the error display is performed, it is determined whether the warning display preparation is completed (step S384). If it is determined in step S382 that it is not determined whether the error display preparation is completed (step S382; NO), it is determined whether the warning display preparation is completed (step S384).

  As a result, when it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (step S384; YES), the warning display is performed (step S385). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29, and “0” and “6” can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 29 may be blinked to indicate that a warning is made, or may be displayed while changing the display color of the display monitor 29. Alternatively, display may be performed by increasing the brightness of the display on the display monitor 29. Thus, it is preferable that the warning display be performed in a more prominent manner than the other displays.

  In addition, when displaying a warning, a predetermined warning may be displayed on a second special symbol display device 8BX or the like on another display device, for example, the image display device 9X or the first special symbol display device 8AX. The effect lamp 28X may be turned on or off in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speaker 27. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the gaming machine provided on the main substrate 31. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

  When the warning is displayed, the ratio / combination ratio control process is ended. If it is determined in step S384 that the warning display preparation has not been completed (step S384; NO), the coupled ratio / combination ratio control process is ended.

  If it is determined that the ratio / combination ratio display preparation is completed (step S 381; YES), the short-term ratio display is performed (step S 386). Subsequently, it is determined whether the short-term continuous ratio display has been started and a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed (step S387). Here, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S387; NO), the process returns to step S386, and the short-term continuous ratio display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S387; YES), the process proceeds to step S388. Thus, the short-term continuous ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds (30000 ms).

  Subsequently, a short-term-combination ratio display is performed (step S388), and it is determined whether a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed after the short-term-combination ratio display is started (step S389). Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S 389; NO), the process returns to step S 388, and the short-term-combination ratio display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S389; YES), the process proceeds to step S390. Thus, the short-term duty ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

  Subsequently, a cumulative link ratio display is performed (step S390), and it is determined whether a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative link ratio display is started (step S391). Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S391; NO), the process returns to step S390, and the cumulative linkage ratio display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S391; YES), the process proceeds to step S392. Thus, the cumulative ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

  Subsequently, cumulative ratio display is performed (step S392), and it is determined whether a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative ratio display was started (step S393). Here, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S393; NO), the process returns to step S392 and continues the cumulative winning combination display. Thus, the short-term duty ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S393; YES), the coupled ratio / combination ratio control process is ended.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative connection ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio are displayed by the display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 31. Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main substrate 31 for controlling the game so as not to hinder visibility. For this reason, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made with respect to game nails (obstacle nails), windmills, etc. provided on the game board.

  Further, the display monitor 29 is disposed in front of the main substrate 31 when it is viewed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 from being disturbed. Further, the main substrate 31 is disposed at a position where the heat dissipation hole provided in the substrate case 201 is not directly in front. Therefore, the display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 31 can be prevented from being obscured by the heat radiation holes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 31 from being disturbed.

  Further, the main substrate 31 is disposed at a position not overlapping with the peripheral substrates other than the main substrate 31. Therefore, the display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 31 can be prevented from being obscured by the peripheral substrate such as the effect control substrate 80. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 provided on the main substrate 31 from being disturbed.

  Further, on the display monitor 29, it is possible to display a ratio or a part ratio relating to the relationship between the winning balls paid out by passing the electric chew and the attacker and the winning balls paid out by passing the general winning opening. . Further, the display monitor 29 can switch and display predetermined information such as a short-term connection ratio and a cumulative connection ratio for each predetermined period. For this reason, since it is not necessary to provide a display for displaying the information about a several period, it can contribute to the reduction of a number of parts.

  In addition, the display monitor 29 displays a ratio (short-term ratio) or a ratio (short-term ratio) every 6,000 winning balls, so that the total winning balls become 6,000, etc. A numerical value of a period corresponding to a certain unit can be easily recognized. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than when the number of winning balls is 6,000. For example, it may be a period in which the number of winning balls is 1,000 or 10,000. Alternatively, time may be used instead of the number of winning balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as one hour, three hours, or ten hours.

  Further, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the cumulative ratio and the cumulative ratio, in addition to the ratio (short-term ratio) and the ratio (short-term ratio) each time the number of winning balls reaches 6,000. Therefore, it is possible to easily compare the short-term connection ratio and the short-term combination ratio with the predetermined combination of units, the cumulative connection ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the like. Further, the display monitor 29 is provided on the main substrate 31 housed in the crimped substrate case. For this reason, it can contribute to the prevention of fraud such as falsifying the display on the display monitor 29.

  In addition, the gaming machine 1 is provided with detection means for detecting and detecting fraud that can not display proper predetermined information. The fraud here includes, for example, counting the number of winning balls outside the business hours of the game, counting the number of winning balls while the door frame is open, and winning a game ball exceeding the allowable number of winnings. The gaming machine 1 operates within the business hours of the game arcade, and the counting of prize balls at times other than business hours is highly likely to be fraudulent. In addition, the gaming machine 1 is to play a game by closing the door frame, and counting the winning balls during the opening of the door frame is highly likely to be a fraud.

  In addition, during the game of the gaming machine 1, the gaming ball can not be fired beyond a certain speed. For example, the number of shots of the game ball is 100 for a maximum of one minute. For this reason, the upper limit number of winning game balls in one minute is about 100. Therefore, for example, when winning of 100 game balls per minute or more than 20 game balls is detected in 12 seconds, the probability of having a fraudulent action becomes extremely high.

  In the gaming machine 1, in order to detect fraud, when not within business hours, when the glass door frame is not closed, the number of prize balls when the game ball has won a predetermined number of balls or more per unit time The addition of is excluded. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the falsification of information on the ratio and proportions due to the fraud. It should be noted that the fraud may be detected based on the number of balls paid out per unit time, instead of the number of balls won when the game ball has won a predetermined number of balls or more in the attacker per unit time.

  Further, in the above-described gaming machine 1, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 55 reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is erased. Therefore, the ring buffer can be prevented from running out of capacity.

  In the ring buffer, the first storage area to the tenth storage area are provided, and when the data of the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data of the 10th storage area is It is erased. For this reason, since the data to be erased is in units of predetermined units, it is possible to prevent the capacity shortage of the ring buffer. In addition, data remaining without being erased can be increased.

  When moving the data of the 0th storage area of the active buffer to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data of the 9th storage area of the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, data in the tenth storage area may be erased to move data in the ninth storage area, or data in the tenth storage area may be overwritten with data in the tenth storage area. Even in this case, the capacity shortage of the ring buffer can be prevented.

  When moving the data of the 0th storage area of the active buffer to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, in the ring buffer, the data of the 10th storage area, which is a part of the storage area, is erased. For this reason, since the data to be erased can be reduced, the capacity shortage of the ring buffer can be prevented, and the coupling ratio and the duty ratio can be calculated with a large amount of data.

  When the data in the ring buffer is erased, not only the data in the tenth storage area but also all the data in the first to tenth storage areas may be erased. . In this case, the capacity shortage of the ring buffer can be prevented more suitably. Also, part or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, at the start of business hours, all data in the ring buffer may be erased first, and then part of data in the ring buffer may be erased.

  In the above example, movement of data in the ring buffer is described, but some or all of the data in the storage area other than the ring buffer, for example, the storage area for storing the total sum, is similarly erased. May be

  Further, in the above-described gaming machine 1, data of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio are displayed in a cycle of 30 seconds. Therefore, each data can be easily compared. The period of displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate period. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Or, it may be every hour. Further, the data to be displayed may be data other than the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative connection ratio, and the cumulative combination ratio data, or may be only a part of these data.

  In addition, when displaying the data of short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, cumulative connection ratio, and cumulative combination ratio every 30 seconds, the short-term connection ratio is displayed differently from other data. Specifically, short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red, and other data are displayed in green. For this reason, it can be made to recognize that new data are displayed from a short-term connection ratio.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, when an abnormal operation is performed, a warning display is performed. Specifically, when the clear switch is operated, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation. The clear switch is a so-called emergency switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the ratio or the ratio of parts. When this switch is operated, it is possible to falsify the data of connection ratio and duty ratio, so the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. In the gaming machine 1, since this abnormal operation can be warned by a warning display, it is possible to suppress the fraud such as falsification of data.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning opening switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, and the third general winning opening switch 24C. The combination ratio and the winning ratio are calculated based on the number of winning balls obtained based on the detection signal from the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. For example, using a sensor (count switch 23) individually provided to the attacker, and a sensor provided after the discharge passage where the gaming medium winning the attacker and the gaming medium winning the electric chow are discharged joins, If the combination ratio and the combination ratio are calculated by counting to the counter of winning ball number of balls and the counter of winning ball number of consecutive rolls based on the detection result, it is difficult to specify which winning opening from which payout. There is a possibility that the calculation of the ratio and the ratio will be complicated. In this respect, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning opening switch 24A, the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, the fourth general winning opening It is detected that the game medium has won by the switch 24D, and the winning ratio is determined based on the winning on each winning opening by calculating the ratio and the winning ratio based on the winning number obtained from the detection result. it can. Therefore, while being able to calculate a coupled ratio and a part ratio easily, it can calculate with sufficient accuracy.

  In the second modification described above, a ring buffer provided with ten maximum 2-byte counters is used as a storage area for storing information on winning a game, but a maximum 3-byte counter or a maximum 4-byte counter Can also be provided. At this time, based on the total number of acquired balls of gaming media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine, calculation for displaying the above two types of ratio (%) and combination ratio (%) on the display monitor 29 described above The method is not limited to the method described above, and may be as follows. As shown in FIG. 56, when counting each of the total number of acquired balls, the number of obtained balls, and the number of continuously obtained balls by the counter composed of maximum 4 bytes, calculation is performed using the upper 16 bits thereof You may go. By the way, if it is assumed that the number of acquisition balls is 30,000 per day by the counter of 4 bytes, 4294836225 (4 bytes) / 30000 (the number of acquisition balls per day) = 143161.2075, 143161.2075 / 365 days = Approximately 392, which is a calculation to cover the total of 392 years.

  In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 48A, the display monitor 29 is provided at the center of the main substrate 31 housed in the substrate case 201. May be provided at other positions.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 57A, a display substrate 31D is provided separately from the main substrate 31C provided with no display monitor and the main substrate 31C, and the main substrate 31C and the display substrate 31D are connected by a harness 31E. The display monitor 29 may be provided on the display substrate 31D. In this case, the main substrate 31C performs the calculation of the ratio and the duty ratio displayed on the display monitor 29 and the reception of data used for the calculation. The main substrate 31C transmits the calculated coupling ratio, duty ratio, and information regarding control for displaying these to the display substrate 31D via the harness 31E. In the display substrate 31D, based on the data transmitted from the main substrate 31C, the display ratio can be displayed on the display monitor 29.

  The main substrate 31C and the display substrate 31D are housed in a substrate case 201A which is a caulking substrate case. The caulking pin 31B is attached to the substrate case 201A as in the case of the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. By providing the caulking pins 31B, the main substrate 31C and the display substrate 31D are completely sealed in the substrate case 201A, thereby preventing an unauthorized action on the main substrate 31C. Also in the substrate case 201A, as in the case of the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 48A, holes and heat dissipation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat radiation holes, and seals are disposed so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 57B, the display substrate 31D may be provided outside the substrate case 201B which is a caulking substrate case, and the main substrate 31C may be sealed in the substrate case 201B. In this example, the display substrate 31D is connected to the main substrate 31C by a harness 31E.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 57C, the display substrate 31D may be sealed in the substrate case 201C, and the main substrate 31C may be sealed in the substrate case 201B. In this example, the display substrate 31D is connected to the main substrate 31C by a harness 31E. Also in the substrate case 201C, as in the case of the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 48A, holes and heat dissipation holes are provided, and predetermined seals are provided. These holes, heat radiation holes, and seals are disposed so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29. The substrate case 201C for sealing the display substrate 31D may not be a caulking substrate case, or may be a caulking substrate case.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), a label is attached to the surface of the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 47 (A), and a label for caulking use is described on the label 31R. It is also good. Here, the label 31 </ b> R may be disposed at a position that hides part of the display monitor 29. As described above, by partially hiding the display monitor 29 by the label 31R, for example, when the glass door frame is opened, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the ratio or the ratio. Further, even when the label 31R is attached, the display monitor 29 may be attached at a position not to be hidden.

  Further, in the above-mentioned second modification, as the movable role, an electric role such as a large winning opening (attacker) opened and closed by a solenoid or a second start winning opening (electric chow) is used. Instead of this, a so-called mechanical part that opens and closes by its own weight may be used as the movable part. In addition, although a 7-segment LED is used as the display monitor 29, a 7-segment LED may be replaced by a dot display, a display screen, or the like. Further, instead of the LED, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL, a fluorescent display tube, or the like may be used.

  Further, in the second modification, the glass door frame may be opened regardless of the contents displayed on the display monitor 29, for example, the display of the ratio ratio or the ratio, etc., to deal with the error cancellation or the like. For example, in order to pay out the gaming balls, there may be provided a replenishment mechanism for replenishing the gaming balls (refilling balls) on the back side of the gaming board. In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball jam occurs, the glass door frame may be opened to eliminate the ball jam and the error may be canceled. In the case where the glass door frame is opened and the error is canceled regardless of the contents displayed on the display monitor 29 as described above, the display ratio of the display monitor 29 may not be displayed. .

  Further, at this time, in order not to display the ratio or the ratio on the display monitor 29, it is also possible to make a condition that an error on the display such as the ratio or the ratio does not occur. The error with respect to the display of the ratio, part ratio, etc. here is, for example, detection of abnormal operation determined in step S381 shown in FIG. 54 or acquisition of winning information within business hours determined in step S384, step S396. It is also possible to detect a predetermined number of winnings or more for the attacker per unit time determined in the above. Under the condition that no error occurs in the display of such a ratio or combination, it is possible to suppress a situation where information such as the ratio or combination can be seen in the player.

  In addition, the glass door frame is opened regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, and the error is canceled, and after the error cancellation is completed, a predetermined period, for example, is displayed until the ratio to the display monitor 29 is displayed. It may stand by for one minute and may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. After the occurrence of an error, it is not possible to completely remove the cause of the occurrence of the error, and similar errors often occur in succession. By displaying the ratio on the display monitor 29 such as the ratio or the ratio after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing information such as the ratio or the ratio even when such an error occurs. . The predetermined period here can be set arbitrarily, and may be longer than 1 minute such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or may be shorter than 1 minute such as 30 seconds. Also, the predetermined time may be set according to the cause of the error. For example, in the case of ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism and in the case of failure of the image display device 9X, the predetermined period of the ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

  In addition, the main substrate 31 is provided with a display device other than the display monitor 29, for example, a 7-segment display (hereinafter referred to as "error display") for displaying an error. Preferably, the error indicator is located at a distance from the display monitor 29. Specifically, the display monitor 29 may be disposed at the right 1/3 of the main substrate 31, and the error indicator may be disposed at the left 1/3 of the main substrate 31. Also, in order to make the display monitor 29 easy to understand, it may be printed with characters on the substrate case 201 where the display monitor 29 is located on the main substrate 31 or a seal may be attached to the substrate case 201. You may leave it.

  Further, in the above-described second modification, the pachinko gaming machine is taken as an example to calculate the duty ratio (%) and the ratio (%) and display on the display monitor has been described. A value corresponding to (%) or a ratio (%) may be calculated and displayed.

  The method of calculating the coupling ratio (%) in the slot machine will be described below. In the slot machine, the fluctuation of the symbol can be started by setting the number of bets, and a prize is generated according to the result of the fluctuation of the symbol. For winning in a slot machine, it shifts to a special gaming state in which the probability of occurrence of the award winning, the re-gaming winning where the fluctuation of the symbol can be started without setting the bet number, and the award winning with the award of gaming value There is a bonus prize. Here, the consecutive ratio (%) in the slot machine is the total of gaming value obtained by occurrence of the award winning as a result of the fluctuation of the symbol during the period in which the fluctuation of the symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (the above pachinko gaming machine Of the game value obtained as a result of the award winning as a result of the fluctuation of the symbol during the period of transition to the special game state with respect to the total winning balls in the game machine (the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine It is expressed by the ratio of consecutive winnings acquisition ball number). For example, when the number of medals which is an example of the game value obtained in the period is 16000 during the period in which the variation of the symbol of 6,000 times is performed, the award winnings are made in the period transitioning to the special game state When the number of medals obtained by the above is 9,000, 0.56 obtained by dividing 9000 by 16000 is a coupled ratio (%).

  In addition, although the example which displays the calculated part ratio (%) and coupling ratio (%) in the display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided in the center of the main board was shown, it is not restricted to this, but it is a payout control board etc. A display monitor may be provided on another board of the above, a game board surface, a gaming machine frame (underframe) or the like. Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of a dedicated display monitor for displaying a duty ratio (%) or a link ratio (%), and an existing display device (for example, an image display device 9X; The ratio (%) or the ratio (%) may be displayed by using a credit display or a number-of-payouts display in a slot machine or a slot machine.

  As described above, according to the above-described embodiment and the second modification, the specific region (in this example, the first start) to which the game media (in this example, the game ball) passes is provided with a value. Predetermined information (in this example, a ratio, a combination ratio, etc.) relating to the value provided by passing the game medium to a specific area, a winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a big winning opening, and a general winning opening in the second modification). And an information display means (in this example, a display monitor 29) capable of displaying. And, the information display means is provided on the substrate for controlling the game so as not to hinder the visibility (see FIG. 47). Therefore, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made.

  Although the above embodiment and the second modification show the case where the information display means (in the present example, the display monitor 29) is provided on the main substrate 31, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, as long as the display monitor 29 is provided so as not to hinder visibility, the display monitor 29 may be provided on another substrate such as the effect control substrate 80, the payout control substrate 37, and the relay substrate 177. . In addition, for example, the display monitor 29 is provided on a dedicated substrate for displaying predetermined information (in this example, a ratio or combination ratio), and predetermined information such as a ratio or combination ratio is displayed. It may be configured.

  Note that it is also possible to configure a gaming machine by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification. That is, the gaming machine may be configured by appropriately combining any of the configurations of the embodiment and the modifications shown above or combining all the configurations.

  In the above embodiment, the fluctuation time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of pseudo run (effect of temporary stop and re-variation of one or more symbols being executed during one variable display), etc. In order to notify the microcomputer for effect control of the fluctuation pattern indicating an aspect, an example is shown in which one fluctuation pattern command is transmitted when the fluctuation is started. However, for effect control for the fluctuation pattern with two or more commands It may be notified to the microcomputer. Specifically, when notified by two commands, before the game control microcomputer 560 reaches reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo reciprocation, presence or absence of slip rendition as the first command (in the case where it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and as the second command after reaching a reach (such as reach type or presence / absence of re-lottery effect) (when it does not reach, so-called A command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode) after the second stop may be transmitted. In that case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display (variable display) based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and may select the concrete fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing by the effect control microcomputer. When transmitting two commands, two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt, and after a first command has been transmitted, a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next The second command may be transmitted in the timer interrupt). Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission may be changed as appropriate. By notifying the variation pattern with two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that needs to be stored as the variation pattern command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, “the proportions are different” means not only those having different proportions such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. A: B = 100%: 0% is a concept that includes different proportions (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In the above embodiment, for example, the case of variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols, effect symbols, and normal symbols of “1” to “9” and deriving and displaying the display result is shown, but the variable display is It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol displayed to be variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  In the present embodiment, as the predetermined effect, the display of the number of past award balls and the number of cumulative award balls is performed, but another display may be performed. For example, it may be a display of the winning admissible number to the large winning a prize opening in one round in the jackpot gaming state. The allowable winning number for the big winning opening in one round is, for example, the number obtained by subtracting the number of gaming balls that have won the big winning opening in one round from the upper limit winning number in one round. For example, when there are three gaming balls in the large winning opening during one round, and the upper limit winning number in one round is 10, the allowable number of winnings for the large winning opening in one round is It is "7". Further, in the predetermined effect, instead of the winning admissible number for the big winning opening in one round, the winning number for the big winning opening in one round may be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is an end condition that the contingency game state ends without shifting to the big hit gaming state, and in the effect control board 12, when the contingency end specification command is received, Although the end is determined, the effect control board 12 may determine the end of the consecutive units according to other conditions. For example, after receiving the hit end command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is confirmed up to the number of probability variations (100 in this embodiment), and the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the big hit is received If not, it may be determined that the end of the house has been reached. Alternatively, a command for specifying the number of times of probability variation may be transmitted to the effect control substrate 12 from the main board, and the end of the connection may be determined based on the command for specifying number of times of variation and the variation pattern command.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state necessarily shifts to the probability variation gaming state, but may be another mode. For example, as the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends, any of the following patterns may be set.

1. The first pattern after the end of the jackpot gaming state After the jackpot gaming state is over, transition to the probability change gaming state (high probability high base gaming state) at an appropriate rate, for example 50% rate, the time saving gaming state at 50% rate The transition to the low probability high base gaming state), the probability variation gaming state continues until the transition to the big hit gaming state, and the time saving gaming state is the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the transition to the big hit gaming state Continue, shift to the big hit gaming state within the time-saving number, or end when the time-saving number of special-figure games are executed. In this case, it may be set that the special game game of the time saving count is executed and the time saving game state is finished as the continuous finish condition.

2. The second pattern after the end of the jackpot gaming state After the jackpot gaming state is over, transition to the probability change gaming state (high probability high base gaming state) at an appropriate rate, for example 50% rate, time saving game state at 50% rate The transition to the low probability high base gaming state), the probability variation gaming state continues until transitioning to the predetermined number of probability variation (for example 100 times) or the big hit gaming state, the time saving gaming state is a predetermined number of time reductions (for example, It continues until it shifts to the jackpot gaming state 100 times) or the jackpot gaming state, and transitions to the jackpot gaming state within the time saving count, or ends when the time saving special figures game is executed. In this case, it may be set that the continuous variation termination condition is that the special variation game of the definite variation number or the special variation game of the short time count is executed and the definite variation gaming state or the short time gaming condition is ended.

3. Third pattern after the end of the jackpot gaming state After the jackpot gaming state is over, always shift to the probability change gaming state, and continue until it shifts to the predetermined probability number of changes (for example 100 times) or the big hit gaming state, special figure of the number of probability change After the game is executed and the probability change gaming state is ended, the time transition to the short game state is made, and the transition to the big hit gaming state within the time reduction number or the special pattern game of the time reduction number is ended. In this case, it may be set that the special game game of the time saving count is executed and the time saving game state is finished as the continuous finish condition.

4. Fourth pattern after the end of the jackpot gaming state After the jackpot gaming state is over, transition to the probability change gaming state (high probability high base gaming state) at an appropriate ratio, for example 50%, normal gaming state at 50% The transition to (low probability low base gaming state) is made, and the probability variation gaming state continues until transitioning to the big hit gaming state. In this case, the end of the jackpot gaming state for transitioning to the normal gaming state may be set as the end condition of the continuous play.

5. Fifth Pattern after End of the Big Hit Game State After satisfying the consecutive finish conditions shown in the first to fourth patterns after the end of the big hit game state, chance time presentation may be executed until establishment of the CT end condition. In this case, the CT end condition may be set as the continuous end condition. The CT end condition may be, for example, that a predetermined number of CTs, for example, 20 special drawing games have been executed. The chance time presentation may be executed, for example, in the normal gaming state (low probability low base gaming state).

  In addition, among the first to fifth patterns after the end of the big hit gaming state described above, in a pattern having a plurality of gaming states other than the big hit gaming state, a predetermined effect is not executed or not for each gaming state. It is also good. For example, in the first pattern, a predetermined effect is executed in the probability variation gaming state, a predetermined effect does not have to be executed in the time reduction gaming status, a predetermined effect is not executed in the probability variation gaming state, and a predetermined effect is displayed in the time reduction gaming status It may be executed. Moreover, in the fifth pattern after the second pattern, a predetermined effect is executed during CT after the probability variation gaming state, and a predetermined effect is not executed during CR after the time reduction gaming status, or during CT after the probability variation gaming state The predetermined effect may be performed during CR after the short time game state without executing the predetermined effect. Further, the predetermined effect may or may not be performed in units other than the gaming state. For example, in the third pattern, the predetermined effect may be executed in the big hit gaming state after the probability variation gaming state, and the predetermined effect may not be executed in the big hit gaming state after the short time gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the predetermined effect, in the first predetermined effect, the cumulative award ball number, the number of past award balls for each big hit and the cumulative award ball number in the first predetermined effect, and in the second predetermined effect, the cumulative award ball number and the type of big hit The number of past prize balls is displayed, but other kinds of prize balls may be displayed. For example, a predetermined number of groupings, for example, the number of winning balls for every three big hits may be displayed along with the big hit icon, or the number of groupings per type of big hit, for example, each of the first big hit and the second big hit The number of balls may be displayed along with the big hit icon for every three big hits.

  In addition, only the number of winning balls may be displayed without displaying the big hit icon. Alternatively, a unit such as “individual” may be added to the number of past award balls, the cumulative number of award balls, etc. and displayed. The unit to be added may be a display that suggests numerical values such as "points" as well as "individual", or may be displayed such as "gold" and "mile" in relation to background rendering.

  Further, during the jackpot gaming state, the number of past award balls and the number of cumulative award balls are displayed in all rounds, but the presence or absence of display may be changed for each round. For example, the number of past award balls may be displayed in the even round, and the cumulative number of winning balls may be displayed in the odd round. In addition, in order to make the player select the presence / absence of display during one round or every round, the button icon 410 is displayed large at the start of one round or each round, and characters such as "Please select the display method" May be displayed. You may do it. Similarly, the controller icon 420 may be displayed large at the start of one round or each round to prompt selection of a specific effect.

  Also, as the number of prize balls such as the number of past prize balls and cumulative number of prize balls, values calculated by actually counting such as the number of past prize balls number display count value and cumulative prize number ball count value are used. It may be an approximate value. For example, an average value of the number of winning balls to be paid out in each round may be assumed, and the average value may be accumulated to perform winning balls.

  In the above embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out by the prize winning in the general prize winning opening is also included in the past number of prize balls and the accumulated number of prize winning balls, but without including the number of prize balls paid out by winning in the general prize winning opening The number of winning balls to be paid out by the winning of the special winning opening may be counted.

  In addition, when counting the number of prize balls such as the number of past prize balls and cumulative number of prize balls, the number of prize balls paid out by the game ball to the large winning opening and the general winning opening is used. The number of winning balls to be paid out by winning in the mouth may be counted together. In addition, the number of winning balls may be counted by subtracting the number of playing balls hit from the hitting ball launch device from the gaming ball entered into the out port without winning in the winning opening from the actual winning ball number.

  Also, in this embodiment, the number of winning balls in the big hit gaming state is counted as the number of past winning balls and the number of accumulated winning balls, but the number of winning balls in the probability changing gaming state during the big hit gaming state in consecutive villas is also counted. You may make it count and display. In this case, the number of winning balls in the probability variation gaming state may be displayed alone, or may be displayed by being added to the number of past award balls in the jackpot before the probability variation gaming state. In addition, in gaming machines in which continuous play continues at a time hit short game state or during a big hit during CT, the number of award balls during time short game state or during CT may be handled in the same manner as the number of award balls during definite change game state .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the current award ball number and the cumulative award ball number are counted by different award ball number display counters to obtain the current award ball number (past award ball number) and the cumulative award ball number. The number of winning balls (the number of past winning balls) and the cumulative number of winning balls may be counted by a common winning number display counter. In this case, the number of winning balls this time is counted by this winning ball number display counter, and when one big hit gaming state is finished, it is regarded as the number of past winning balls, and the cumulative number of winning balls is determined You just need to ask.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of award balls is not displayed during the big hit specific effect or the ending effect, but may be displayed during the big hit specific effect or the ending effect. In this case, for example, the number of winning prize balls and the number of cumulative winning balls may be displayed together, or either one may be displayed. In addition, during the ending effect it is possible to indicate also the number of past prize balls.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when displaying the number of past award balls and the number of cumulative award balls, generation of voice and the like is not performed, but the player is notified of the number of past prize balls and cumulative number of prize balls by voice appropriately. It is also good. In this case, when the number of past prize balls exceeds the upper threshold, for example, when the number of prize balls is 1000 or more in the first big hit, or the cumulative number of prize balls is a good number of drills (so-called "Kiri No.") For example, when the number reaches 10000, the number of past prize balls and the number of accumulated prize balls may be notified by voice. In addition to the speeches of the past award balls and the accumulated prize balls, a bless speech such as "Congratulations" may be generated.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, switching between a predetermined effect and a specific effect is basically possible during the big hit gaming state and during the probability variation gaming state, but in the special figure game of the probability variation gaming state, the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol Switching from the start to the reach formation in the decorative pattern is possible between the predetermined effect and the specific effect. After the reach formation, the predetermined effect or the specific effect can not be switched. For this reason, it is possible to suppress a defect due to the switching of the predetermined effect or the specific effect being executed during the reach effect. Further, even when reach formation is not performed, switching of a predetermined effect or a specific effect may not be possible when the decorative symbol is stopped. In this case, it is possible to prevent the stop of the decorative pattern from being difficult to see by switching between the predetermined effect and the specific effect.

  Even in the probability variation gaming state, the special drawing game may be interrupted, and when the special drawing game is interrupted, a waiting effect (demonstration effect) may be executed until the special drawing game is started. Even when the demonstration effect is executed during the probability variation gaming state, the controller icon 420 or the button icon 410 may be displayed to make it possible to switch between the specific effect and the display effect. Alternatively, one of the controller icon 420 and the button icon 410 may be displayed, and one of the specific effect and the display effect may be switchable. In addition, one of the controller icon 420 and the button icon 410 is changed and displayed during a predetermined demonstration display period, for example, every 10 seconds, so that a switchable effect can be changed by either a specific effect or a display effect. May be

  In the above embodiment, the predetermined effect is switched by operating the push button 31B, and the specific effect is switched by operating the stick controller 31A. For example, common operations such as operating the push button 31B The predetermined effect and the specific effect may be switched in In this case, for example, an operation effective condition for switching of each effect may be set, and the effect may be switched by satisfying the operation effective condition. As the operation valid condition, for example, the switching of the predetermined effect may be a pressing operation in which the pressing time is 1 second or less, and the switching of the specific effect may be the pressing operation in which the pressing time exceeds 1 second. Further, the predetermined effect and the specific effect may be switched by the operation of the stick controller 31A. In this case, the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A to the front may be an operation valid condition for switching a predetermined effect, and the operation of pushing the stick controller 31A toward the gaming machine may be an operation valid condition for switching a specific effect. Alternatively, the operation in the left and right direction of the stick controller 31A may be the operation effective condition for switching the predetermined effect, and the operation in the upper and lower direction of the stick controller 31A may be the operation effective condition for switching the predetermined effect. . In addition, the gaming state may be the operation valid condition. For example, the jackpot gaming state and the probability variation gaming state may be operation effective conditions for switching the predetermined effect, and the jackpot gaming state may be the operation effective condition for switching the specific effect. In addition, the operation effective conditions may be set by appropriately replacing or combining these operation effective conditions.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the specific effect, the animation character and the specific background image are displayed on the image display device 5, but other effects may be used. For example, a promotion video of an artist may be used as a background image. In addition, when a promotion video of an artist is used as a background image, music of the artist may be played.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the first big hit and the second big hit that open the big winning opening once in each round game are provided, but the big winning opening is opened twice or more in all or part of the round games A big hit may be provided to be in the state.
(1) As an example, the first one may execute short-term opening a plurality of times, and a round may be provided after which the closing state may be established. For example, short-term (for example, 0.1 second) opening → closed (for example 2 seconds etc) → short-term (for example 0.1 second etc) opening → closed (for example 2 seconds etc) → short-term (for example 0.1 second etc) A round such as opening → closing (eg 2 seconds etc) → opening short term (eg 0.1 seconds etc) → long-term closing (eg 23.1 seconds etc) may be provided.
(2) As another example, the first one may execute short-term opening a plurality of times, and thereafter a long-term opening state may be provided. For example, short-term (for example, 0.1 second) opening → closed (for example 2 seconds etc) → short-term (for example 0.1 second etc) opening → closed (for example 2 seconds etc) → short-term (for example 0.1 second etc) ) Even if a round such as opening → closing (eg 2 seconds etc) → opening short term (eg 0.1 seconds etc) → closing (eg 2 seconds etc) → opening long term (eg 21.1 seconds) Good. (3) As another example, the first one may be in the long-term open state, and thereafter the short-term opening may be performed a plurality of rounds. For example, long-term (for example 21.1 seconds) opening → closing (for example 2 seconds etc) → short-term (for example 0.1 seconds etc) opening → closing (for example 2 seconds etc) → short-term (for example 0.1 seconds etc) Even if there is a round such as opening → closing (eg 2 seconds etc.) → opening short term (eg 0.1 seconds etc.) → closing (eg 2 seconds etc) → opening short term (eg 0.1 seconds etc) Good.
(4) As another example, short-term opening may be performed a plurality of times at the beginning and the end, and the other may be provided with a long-term open state. For example, short-term (for example, 0.1 second) opening → closed (for example 2 seconds etc) → short-term (for example 0.1 second etc) opening → closing (for example 2 seconds etc) → long-term (for example 21.1 seconds) Even if there is a round such as opening → closing (eg 2 seconds etc.) → opening short term (eg 0.1 seconds etc.) → closing (eg 2 seconds etc) → opening short term (eg 0.1 seconds etc) Good.

  The above (1) to (4) exemplifies a mode in which the big winning opening is opened twice or more in the round game, and a mode in which the big winning opening is opened twice or more in the round game Is not limited to the above (1) to (4). For example, in the examples of (1) to (4) above, although the short-term opening time is the same time (for example, 0.1 seconds), a plurality of short-term opening times (for example, 0.1 seconds) in one round 0.2 seconds etc.) may be provided. Moreover, in the example of said (1)-(4), although the closing time between short opening times is made the same time (for example, 2.0 second), it is the same also about the said closing time. Further, the number of times of release may be different from the above (1) to (4).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state. That is, the jackpot symbol is an advantageous condition that leads to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, an example is described in which the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is in the open state by being controlled to the big hitting gaming state when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, but also in other cases. May be open. For example, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 may be in an open state by providing a sudden (probable definite change) controlled in a case where a sudden symbol is derived and displayed. Further, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 may be opened by providing a small hit which is controlled when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed.

  As mentioned above, although embodiment etc. of this invention were described, apparatus structure, data structure, the process shown by the flowchart, the image display apparatus 5, the 1st special symbol display apparatus 4A, the 2nd special symbol display apparatus 4B, and the normal symbol display 20 and various rendering operations including the display operation of the common view reservation display 25C can be arbitrarily changed and corrected without departing from the scope of the present invention.

  For example, although the number of winning balls in the big winning opening is “15” and the counting number (the number corresponding to the winning upper limit determination value) is “10” in the above embodiment, it is an example and may be another number.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is provided at the left and right centers of the game area, but the special variable winning prize ball device 7 may be provided on the right or left side of the left and right centers of the game area. In addition, even in the case of arranging at any position of the game area, it is possible to arrange the special variable winning ball device 7 in a form that is likely to cause over winning. For example, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a width (length in the left-right direction) of the maximum size (for example, 135 mm or the like) may be disposed. In addition, the special variable winning ball device 7 may not have a winning opening door, as long as the over winning is unlikely to occur. For example, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 may have a movable wing piece, or may have a movable bottom member on which the gaming ball flows down the top.

  In the above embodiment, the type of the big hit (first big hit, second big hit) is determined based on the value of the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, but the condition for determining the type of big hit is It is not limited. For example, a specific area may be provided in the vicinity of or inside the special winning opening, and the type of the big hit may be determined based on the game ball entering (passing) the specific area. . For example, in the case of providing the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit may be determined based on the game ball entering the specific area.

  In the above embodiment, the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the big hit symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, but the big hit gaming state is controlled. The aspect to perform is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second starting winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the game ball entering (passing) in the specific area You may

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, although a mode which carries out variable display of a plurality of kinds of special symbols, such as a number or a symbol of 0-9, and it brings out a display result was shown, variable display is not limited to such a mode. For example, the special symbol to be displayed variably may be different from the special symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, special symbols that are not included in the changing multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as the variable display result, and among the changing multiple types of special symbols, those that are not specially derived displayed as the variable display result May be included. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and the aspect may be such that variable display is performed using only one type of special symbol. As a variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (may be alternately turned on / off). That is, repetition of lighting and extinguishing may be variable display. And even in this case, the one kind of special symbol may be derived and displayed (lit) at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end It may be In addition, the same applies to variable display of other symbols (for example, a normal symbol, a decorative symbol, etc.).

  For example, in the above, “percentage” is not limited to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, such as A: B = 100%: 0% It is a concept that also includes a relationship (that is, a concept that includes 100% for one and 0% for the other). Also, when A is said to have a higher proportion than B, this is a concept that also includes cases where A is 100% and B is less than 100%, and B is 0% and A is greater than 0%. is there.

  Further, for example, in the above embodiment, one fluctuation is started when the fluctuation is started in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation mode such as the fluctuation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo link. Although the example which transmits a pattern designation command was shown, you may make it notify a change pattern to the production control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control board 12 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer 560, the variation time is notified by each of two commands, and the specific variation mode to be executed at each timing is selected by the effect control board 12 It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. As described above, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  In addition, for example, using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, a game score for use in a game is given and The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in a game machine into the game area using the game score or the game score given by the game winning.

  In the above description, the game machine uses game media as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a game medium as a predetermined number of prizes, but is a game medium such as a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that provides a score when the condition for giving a prize is satisfied.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer device It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the later-described form examples and the modifications may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  The gaming machine of the present invention further includes an operation means (for example, push button 31B etc.) operable by the player, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg big hit gaming state etc.) advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine, and predetermined effect execution means (for example, for example, the first predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (A) and the second predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (B)) is executed during the advantageous state. A presentation control board 12) is provided, and the execution mode of the predetermined presentation can be changed based on the operation of the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 43A, by operating the push button 31B, 43 (A) is switched to a second predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 (B)), and a second position (e.g., a retraction position) different from the first position (e.g., the first position) , 1st advance position and 2nd advance position And a position detection means (for example, a first photo) for detecting that the movable body is positioned at the first position. Sensor 90203) and means for controlling the displacement of the movable body, wherein displacement control means capable of performing repetitive displacement control to repeatedly displace the movable body a plurality of times (for example, the CPU for effect control 90120) A portion performing a precursor effect shown in FIG. 85), wherein the displacement control means performs at least one of the repetitive displacement control when performing the repetitive displacement control of repetitively displacing the movable body from the first position; The movable body is displaced out of the detection area of the position detection means in the displacement of the turn (for example, as shown in FIG. By performing at or displaced at least once portion moves the rendering object 90 300 outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90 203) the gaming machine and the like.

  According to this configuration, since effects can be made according to the player's preferences, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the game interest. Also, even if the movable body is repeatedly displaced in the vicinity of the first position, it is possible to detect that the movable body has repeatedly displaced.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the predetermined effect may be executed during the advantageous state and the effect of displacing the movable body may be performed. At this time, the movable body may be displaced when the mode of the predetermined effect becomes the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest during the advantageous state.

  Furthermore, as an example of a game machine capable of detecting that the movable body has repeatedly displaced even if the movable body is repeatedly displaced in the vicinity of the first position, which contributes to the improvement of the amusement of the game. It is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901), and a second position (for example, a first advancing position or a second advancing position) different from the first position (for example, retracted position) and the first position. A movable body (for example, effect body 90300) provided displaceably in the range of and a position detection means (for example, a first for detecting that the movable body is positioned at the first position). Photo sensor 90203) and means for controlling displacement of the movable body, wherein displacement control means capable of performing repetitive displacement control to repeatedly displace the movable body a plurality of times (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) But A portion performing a precursor effect shown in 85), wherein the displacement control means performs at least one time in the repetitive displacement when performing the repetitive displacement control to repeatedly displace the movable body from the first position (For example, as shown in FIG. 83, at least one of the presentation effects is performed by any one of the presentation pattern α to the presentation pattern γ) to displace the movable body out of the detection area of the position detection means. The part may be a game machine for moving the effect body 90300 out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203. Below, an example of this embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. In addition, this other example of a form may be called "an Example""embodiment." In the following description, the front side of FIG. 58 will be described as the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the back side as the rear (back) side. In this embodiment, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is an opposing surface facing the player when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is viewed from the player side. In the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, a portion described as "step S901" may be abbreviated as "S901". Also, in this embodiment, "execution" and "execution" are synonymous.

  FIG. 58 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. Pachinko gaming machines 901 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as gaming machines) are roughly classified into a gaming board 902 (gauge board) which constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 903 (an underframe) for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. And consists of. In the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In the game area, a game ball is fired from the ball striking device and struck. At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 58, the right side of the game area), a first special symbol display 904A and a second special symbol display 904B are provided. The first special symbol display unit 904A and the second special symbol display unit 904B are each composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc. Special symbols (also referred to as "special figures") that are plural types of distinguishable identification information (special identification information) are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display or variable display). In the following, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 904A is also referred to as the "first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display 904B is the "second special view" It is also called.

  Near the center of the game area of the game board 902, an effect display device 905 is provided. The effect display device 905 is configured of, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display Device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 905, for example, three corresponding to the variation display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display 904A and the variation display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display 904B, for example In the effect pattern display area serving as a plurality of variable display units, a effect pattern (also referred to as a decorative pattern), which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each, is variably displayed. The variable display of this effect pattern is also included in the variable display game. In the display area of the effect display device 905, a special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display 904A, or a special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display 904B In synchronization with this, the variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified respectively is performed, and the finalized effect symbols are derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivation"). For example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or “han” or “han”) are displayed on the effect symbols displayed in a variable manner in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R It may be a number, an English letter, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of a number, a character or a symbol and a character image, or the like. Corresponding symbol numbers are attached to each of the rendering symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are attached to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. In addition, the production design is not limited to eight types, but it may be any number as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a combination of "big hit" and a combination of "off" (for example, seven types or 9 types etc).

  The effect display device 905 is disposed on the back side of the game board 902 and can be visually recognized through the opening 902 c formed in the game board 902. In the opening 902 c of the game board 902, a frame-shaped center decoration frame 9051 is provided. Further, a rendering unit 90200 (see FIG. 59) is disposed between the rear surface of the game board 902 and the rendering display device 905, and the rendering unit 90200 includes a first rendering body 90300D and the first rendering body. It has the effect body 90300 comprised from the 2nd effect body 90300U arrange | positioned above. As shown in FIGS. 59 to 63, the effect unit 90200 includes a first movement motor 90201, a first photosensor 90203, an arm 90210, and a slide rail 90220. One end of the arm 90210 in the longitudinal direction is pivotally supported by the rotation shaft of the first moving motor 90201.

  Further, at the other end in the longitudinal direction of the arm 90210, a long hole 90210a facing the longitudinal direction of the arm 90210 is formed. A first rotary encoder 90202 capable of measuring the number of rotations of the first moving motor 90201 is attached to the first moving motor 90201 of this embodiment. The slide rail 90220 is disposed obliquely from the lower left to the upper right, and the first photo sensor 90203 is disposed to the left of the slide rail 90220. On the other hand, a slide rail 90303 is attached to the back side of the first effect body 90300D. The slide rail 90303 is also slidably attached to the slide rail 90220.

  Further, a protrusion 90301 is formed on the back side of the first effect body 90300D so as to protrude, and the protrusion 90301 is disposed in a long hole 90210a formed in the arm 90210. Further, a detector 90302 detectable by the first photosensor 90203 is attached to the back side of the first effect body 90300D. Note that the effect LED 90207 is disposed on the front side of the effect body 90300.

  A second moving motor 90204 and a second rotary encoder 90205 capable of measuring the rotational speed of the second moving motor 90204 are provided on the back side of the effect LED 90207. Furthermore, between the first effect body 90300D and the second effect body 90300U, the second effect body 90300U is placed on the first effect body 90300D by the drive of the second moving motor 90204 from the mounting position A drive mechanism (not shown) is provided for moving to a raised position (see FIG. 65 (B)) above the mounting position. Note that the second effect body 90300U is placed on the first effect body 90300D at the upper end portion of the first effect body 90300D (the second effect body 90300U is located at the placement position) A second photosensor 90206 capable of detecting

  As described above, by the effect body 90300 being attached to the effect unit 90200, the effect body 90300 is, as shown in FIG. 64, FIG. 65 (A) and FIG. 65 (B), the first moving motor. The horizontal width of the effect display device 905 from the retracted position from the retracted position which is the lower left of the effect display device 905 between the back surface of the game board 902 and the effect display device 905 by the rotation of the arm 90210 by the driving force of 90201 A first exit position separated upward to the right toward the approximate center of the direction, and a second exit position separated upward from the first exit to the approximate center of the right and left width direction of the effect display device 905 And, it has become movable.

  In the effect body 90300 arranged at the retracted position, most of the outer shape is concealed from the player by the center decoration frame 9051 or the like, so the area of the outer shape of the effect body 90300 visible to the player is smallest. It has become. In addition, since the lower end portion of the outer shape of the effect body 90300 arranged at the first advance position is concealed from the player by the center decoration frame 9051 or the like, the outer shape of the effect body 90300 visible to the player The area is wider than the retracted position. Furthermore, since the effect body 90300 arranged at the second advanced position has no portion hidden by the center decoration frame 9051 or the like, the area of the outline of the effect body 90300 visible to the player is the widest. It has become. As shown in FIG. 65 (B), the second advanced position is a substantially central portion in the left and right width direction at the lower part of the effect display device 905. Further, the second advancing position in this embodiment is also a position for moving the second effect body 90300U from the mounting position toward the rising position. That is, in this embodiment, it is easy for the player to recognize that the effect body 90300 has moved to the second exit position by moving the second effect body 90300U from the placement position to the ascent position.

  The effect body 90300 in this embodiment can be stopped at each of the retracted position, the first advanced position, and the second advanced position, and the stopped position can be held by the detent torque of the first moving motor 90201. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a support capable of holding the effect body 90300 at each of the retracted position, the first advanced position, and the second advanced position may be provided. As shown in FIG. 61, the first photosensor 90203 in this embodiment is configured to detect the detector 90302 when the effect body 90300 is disposed at the retracted position.

  A hold storage display area 905D is set in the upper left portion of the display area of the effect display device 905, and a hold storage display area 905U is set in the upper right portion of the display area of the effect display device 905. In the pending storage display area 905D, a pending storage display is performed to display the number of pending storages of the variable display corresponding to the first special view game (the number of special view pending storages) in a distinguishable manner. A pending storage display is performed to display the number of pending storages (the number of special views pending storage) of the variable display corresponding to the special view game in a distinguishable manner. Here, the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B for suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special view game. It occurs based on the start-up winning by (entering). That is, although a start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing a variable display game such as a special view game or a variable display of a production symbol is satisfied, a variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed. If the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, etc., suspension of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is To be done.

  In the following description, the display in the hold storage display area 905D and the hold storage display area 905U may be collectively referred to as a hold display. In the example shown in FIG. 58, in order to display the number of special figure reservations in an identifiable manner, in the upper and lower portions of the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B together with the suspension storage display areas 905D and 905U. A first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner.

  The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as the total pending storage number. In this embodiment, the reserve storage display areas 905D and 905U are set in the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 905 in order to prevent the reserve storage display from being hidden by the effect body 90300 due to a notice effect or an indication effect described later. In the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the suspension display areas 905D and 905U may be the staging display devices as long as they are not concealed by the staging body 90300 in the notice production and the admonition effect. It may be set at any place of 905.

  On the pachinko gaming machine 901, various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and an LED control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 59 are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 901 also includes a relay substrate 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate, a power supply substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the game board 902 or the like. The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted.

  The main board 9011 mainly has a setting function of random numbers used in the special view game, a function capable of inputting an output signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and a control board on the sub side A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to the outside are provided.

  In addition, the main board 9011 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and the first special view or the second special view Of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020, and performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 It also has a function to control. The main circuit 9011 includes, for example, a microcomputer 90100 for game control, a switch circuit 90110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 90100 for game control, and a microcomputer 90100 for game control A solenoid circuit 90111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and displays the effect display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. And various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electric parts for presentation such as the LED 909 for presentation are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 is used for effects such as the display operation of the effect display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or part of the on / off operation of the effect LED 909 or the like. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component of the above to execute a predetermined rendering operation. The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012. The sound control board 9013 is a speaker based on a command from the effect control board 9012 or control data (sound number, volume level, etc.) A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing for outputting audio from the 908L and 908R is mounted. The LED control board 9014 is a control board for LED output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on the command and control data from the effect control board 9012, the on / off drive of the effect LED 909 etc. LED driver circuits and the like are mounted.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls paid out by lending can be held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device. A tray (ball hitting supply tray) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a lower tray for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The member forming the upper tray is provided with a push button 9031 B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing operation or the like, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray body. The push button 9031 B may be configured to be able to detect the pressing operation from the player mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically. A push sensor 9035B may be provided inside the main body of the upper tray at the arrangement position of the push button 9031B or the like, for detecting a pressing operation performed by the player on the push button 9031B.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 is relayed by the relay substrate 9015. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. FIG. 66 is an explanatory drawing showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The command form shown in FIG. 66 is an example, and another command form may be used. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and it may be a value according to the content of the instruction by the effect control command.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main substrate 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM 90101 for storing programs for game control, fixed data, etc., and a RAM 90102 for providing a work area for game control A CPU 90103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations; a random number circuit 90104 that independently updates numerical data indicating random numbers; and an I / O 90105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, various processes for controlling the progress of the game are executed by the CPU 90103 executing a program read from the ROM 90101. On the main substrate 9011, a random number value MR1 'for determining the special display result, a random value MR2' for determining the big hit type, a random value MR3 'for changing pattern determination, and a random value for determining the generic display result shown in FIG. Numerical data of various random numbers such as MR4 'are controlled to be able to be counted. The random number circuit 90104 is only required to be able to count numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values MR1 'to MR4', and the CPU 90103 is not limited to software for random number values not counted by the random number circuit 90104. It may be made to count by updating various numerical data by.

  FIG. 68 shows the variation pattern of this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 68 are prepared in advance. Specifically, in this embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "off", the variation display mode of the rendering symbol is "non-reach" and corresponds to the case of "reach", respectively. In addition, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is a "big hit" or the like. The reach effect of normal reach is executed for the big hit fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display result is "big hit", and the reach fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation display mode of the production design is "reach" There are a normal reach change pattern and a super reach change pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the special reach fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is shorter than the super reach fluctuation patterns super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ. It is set. In addition, super reach production of super reach β is executed for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ in this embodiment is executed. The variation pattern has a longer special pattern variation time than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is performed. In this embodiment, as described above, since the fluctuation display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach γ, super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the hit probability is set to be high. In the fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation. In addition, the super reach change pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach γ is executed is also a change pattern in which the pseudo connected effect in which the effect pattern is temporarily stopped before being temporarily stopped before the reach effect is performed is executed.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 90101 of the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 59 also stores various selection data, table data, etc. used to control the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 90101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main substrate 9011, and a plurality of variation patterns as shown in FIG. Table data etc. which constitute a fluctuation pattern table are stored.

  FIG. 69 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. In the display result determination table of this embodiment, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR1 'in accordance with whether the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) or the definite variation state (high probability state). (Judgment value) is assigned to the "big hit" or "off" special map display result. In the display result determination table, determination data is allocated to the determination result as to whether or not the special view display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as "big hit". Specifically, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability state), more judgment values are "big hit" than in the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). It is assigned to the figure display result. In this way, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit" when in the normal state or the short time state (low probable state) in the positive variation state where high probability control is performed Compared to (about 1/300 in this embodiment), the probability that it is determined that the special image display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as "big hit" is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state is the high probability state, the probability that it is determined to control the big hit gaming state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the short time state, The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. In the ROM 90101, when it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state, the big hit type determination table to be referred to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 ', random number value MR3 A variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern as one of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 68 described above is also stored.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 70 (A), depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the judgment value for the big hit type of “probably big hit A” and “prone big hit B” Allocation is different. That is, when the fluctuation special drawing is the second special drawing, no assignment is made to the big hit type of "small fluctuation big hit B" with a small number of rounds, and in the fluctuation display of the second special drawing, "certainly fluctuation big hit B" does not occur In the game state where it is easy for the game ball to easily enter the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B by the high opening control accompanying time saving control, the probability ball obtained is small. Can prevent frequent occurrence of the game and the decrease in the game entertainment. Note that the setting example shown in FIG. 70 (A) is only an example, and a jackpot type other than that shown in FIG. 70 (A) may be provided, and the determination ratio of each jackpot, the presence or absence of the determination, etc. It may be set appropriately. In addition, as the fluctuation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 90101, it is determined in advance that the "big hit" change pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the "big hit" is used. A release fluctuation pattern determination table to be used at the time is prepared in advance.

  In the RAM 90102 shown in FIG. 59, a game control data holding area (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of a game or the like. In the game control data holding area, although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the start winning (first start winning) occurs, it has not been started yet. First special view reservation storage unit storing random number value MR1 ', random number value MR2', numerical value data indicating random number value MR3 'and the like as reserved data of the special view game using the special view, and the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B The game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the game ball and the start winning (second start winning) occurs but as a reserve data for a special figure game using a second special figure that has not yet started, For the progress of the game, such as the second special drawing reserve storage unit that stores the random number value MR1 ', the random number value MR2', the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 ', etc. Multiple statuses can be updated accordingly Used to control the progress of the game, a game control flag setting unit provided with a type flag, a game control timer setting unit provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game Game control provided with a game control counter setting unit provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values, and various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of a game And a buffer setting unit.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the effect control board 9012 is provided with a CPU for effect control 90120 which performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area for the CPU 90120 for effect control. RAM 90122, the display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 905, etc., and the effect control CPU 90120 independently update numerical data indicating random numbers A random number circuit 90124 and an I / O 90125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 90121 to execute various types of processing for controlling the effect operation by the electric component for effect. For example, as processing for controlling these rendering operations, the receiving control for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the rendering control substrate 9012 via the I / O 90125, the rendering control CPU 90120 via the I / O 90125 Then, transmission processing for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 is also performed. In addition, also on the side of the effect control board 9012, similarly to the main board 9011, for example, various random number values (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining execution or non-execution of various effects, type of effect, etc. It is done.

  In addition to the program for effect control, the ROM 90121 also includes various table data used to control the effect operation, for example, the execution and non-execution of various effects, the type of effect, etc. The table data which comprises a plurality of judgment tables, the pattern data which constitutes the production control pattern corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, etc. are stored. Among the effect control patterns, the special pattern fluctuation effect control pattern is the fluctuation display of the effect symbol during the period from when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started until the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to each fluctuation pattern It is comprised from the data etc. which show the control content of various presentation operation | movements, such as an operation | movement and a reach production.

  Further, the RAM 90122 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation. The effect control data holding area is provided with an effect control flag setting unit provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to an effect operation state or an effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011, and various effect operations The effect control timer setting unit and effect control counter setting unit provided with a plurality of types of timers and counters used to control the progress of the image, and the data used to control the progress of various effect operations are temporarily used. And an effect control buffer setting unit provided with various buffers to be stored.

  The effect control flag setting unit can update the state according to, for example, an effect operation state such as a display state of an effect image on the screen of the effect display device 905, an effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state. The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as display operation of effect images on the screen of the effect display device 905, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of the plurality of types of counters. The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, data forming the start winning combination reception command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. Supports the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of pending storages in the first special view pending storage in the start winning receive command buffer. Area) is provided. Also, in the start winning reception command buffer, storage areas (buffer numbers “2-1” to “2-4” corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of reserved storages in the second special view pending storage (Area corresponding to) is provided. When there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the first starting opening winning specifying command or the second starting opening winning specifying command), the pending storage number notification command (the second A command such as a 1 suspension storage number notification command or a 2nd suspension storage number notification command) is transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special view reserve storage in the start winning reception command buffer and the storage area corresponding to the second special view reserve storage are associated with the start opening winning combination designation command and the reserve storage number notification command. A storage area (entry) for dividing and storing the first special view reserve storage and the second special view reserve storage is secured.

  The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the topmost pending storage (buffer number “1-1” or buffer number “2-1”) is started. The memory contents of the buffer number “1-1” or the buffer number “2-1” that stores the contents of the pending storage for which the start condition is satisfied, while being shifted upward one by one It is cleared in the effect design fluctuation stop processing which is executed when finishing the.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment will be described. On the main substrate 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process to be a game control main process. When the CPU 90103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 90103 executes a game control timer interrupt process (not shown).

  When the game control timer interrupt process is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to thereby select the gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 9022B, and the count via the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 9023 is determined (S9011). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S9012). Thereafter, predetermined information output processing is executed (S9013). Next, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers such as the random number values MR1 'to MR4' by software is executed (S9014). Thereafter, the special symbol process shown in FIG. 71 is executed (S9015). Following the special symbol process processing, the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 9020 is controlled, and the variation display of the normal symbol and the tilting of the movable wing piece of the normally variable winning ball device 906B are performed. A normal symbol process process is performed to perform operation setting and the like (S9016). Thereafter, by executing the command control process, the control command is transmitted (outputted) from the main substrate 9011 to the sub-side control substrate such as the effect control substrate 9012 (S9017). FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In the special symbol process process, first, the start winning determination process is executed (S9021). After that, one of the processes in S9022 to S9029 is selected and executed in accordance with the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. First, when the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 starts executing the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (S9051). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S9052). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a timer interrupt flag by timer interrupt processing. If the timer interruption flag is set (on) in the main processing, the effect control CPU 90120 clears the flag (S9053), and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 90120 first performs command analysis processing (S9054). In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 60) the command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 stored in the reception command buffer is. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. And the process etc. which set the flag according to the received presentation control command are performed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs switch processing (S9055). In the switch processing, the state of a detection signal that is input from the push sensor 9035B and that can specify whether or not the push button 9031B has been operated is determined. The detection signal of the push button 9031 B in this embodiment is a signal which is turned ON only when the operation (pressing operation) of the push button 9031 B is started as shown in FIG. 73, and the operation start of the push button 9031 B After that, the detection signal of the push button 9031 B does not become ON until the push button 9031 B is newly operated. For this reason, when the push button 9031 B is continuously hit by the player in the notice effect described later, the player may continuously operate the push button 9031 B (long press) or the like to operate the push button 9031 B in multiple times. It is prevented that it is judged that it is operation of. Further, since the detection signal of the push button 9031 B is turned ON only when the operation of the push button 9031 B is started, the effect control CPU 90120 turns on the detection signal of the push button 9031 B when the push button 9031 B is operated. It can accurately count based on the number of times it has become.

  After executing the switch process, the effect control CPU 90120 performs an effect control process process (S9056). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 905. Next, an effect notification process (S9057) and effect random number updating process for updating the count value of a counter for generating effect random numbers such as a jackpot symbol determination random number are executed (S9056), and then the process proceeds to S9052. In the error notification process of this embodiment, when the indication effect described later is executed for the effect pattern α or effect pattern β, the error notification process notifies that the effect body 90300 is not located at the withdrawal position which is the effect start position. It is processing to do.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (S9056) of the effect control main process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90120 updates the pending display in the pending display area 905D of the effect display device 905 to a display according to the contents of the start winning reception command buffer. It executes (S9072). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 performs one of the processes in S9073 to S9079 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073): It is confirmed whether a fluctuation pattern designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 90100 or not. Specifically, it is checked in the command analysis process whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received. If the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (S9074). Effect pattern fluctuation start process (S9074): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (S9075). Process during effect symbol variation (S9075): Control the switching timing and the like of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern, and monitor the end of the variation time. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S9076). Effect pattern fluctuation stop process (S9076): Based on the fact that the effect control command (pattern decision command) instructing all symbol stop is received, the fluctuation of the effect pattern is stopped and the control to derive and display the display result (stop pattern) Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S9077) or the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073).

  Big hit display process (S9077): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for reporting the occurrence of a big hit on the effect display device 905. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game (S9078). During the big hit game processing (S9078): Control during the big hit game. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 905 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect processing (S9079). Big hit end effect processing (S9079): In the effect display device 905, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073).

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S9074) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether the first change start command reception flag is set in S90271 (S90271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set, it is stored in association with the buffer numbers “1-1” to “1-4” of the first special view hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer. The various command data and the various flags are shifted upward by one buffer number (S90272). The contents of the buffer number “1-1” are erased because they can not be shifted because there is no shift destination.

  If the first change start command reception flag is not set in S90271, it is determined whether the second change start command reception flag is set (S90273). If the second variation start command reception flag is not set, the effect symbol variation start process is ended, and if the second variation start command reception flag is set, the second special figure in the start winning reception command buffer The various command data and the various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" of the pending storage are shifted upward by one buffer number (S90274). The contents of the buffer number “2-1” are erased because they can not be shifted because there is no shift destination.

  After the execution of S90272 or S90274, the effect control CPU 90120 reads out the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (S90275). Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the effect pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (ie, the received display result specification command) (S90276). In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the stop symbol of the effect symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area Do.

  In this embodiment, when the received variable display result specification command is the second variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation big hit A, the effect control CPU 90120, for example, has three symbols “7” as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit design) of the production design that was aligned with. In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation big hit B, as a stop symbol, a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", It is determined from "combinations of rendering symbols such as" 333 "," 555 ", and" 999 ". In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probable variable big hit, the effect control CPU 90120, for example, as a stop pattern, the 3 design symbols are aligned with even symbols Determine the combination (big hit design). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is a first variable display result specification command corresponding to a release, a combination (deletion design) of a production design in which 3 symbols become irregular as a stop design is determined.

  In determining these stop symbols, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 extracts a random number for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of effect symbols are associated with numerical values. It is sufficient to decide the stop symbol of the effect symbol. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the advance notice effect determination processing shown in FIG. 76, and determines whether to execute the advance notice effect in the variable display (S90277). In this embodiment, as described later, in the notice effect determination process, only the move effect in which the effect body 90300 moves from the retracted position to the first advanced position or the second advanced position is determined. The preview effects are not limited to these, and for example, a step-up notice in which the notice image changes stepwise or a group notice of a group of predetermined characters crossing the display area. Etc. may be determined.

  In the advance notice effect determination process of this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 first specifies a change display result and a change pattern (S90291). The fluctuation display result is a fluctuation for storing the fluctuation display result specification command for specifying the fluctuation display result (disappeared, positive change big hit A, positive change big hit B, non-positive change big hit) sent from the main substrate 9011 at the start of change. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be identified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variation pattern identified in S90291 is a variation pattern of super reach (S90292). If the variation pattern identified in S90291 is the variation pattern of normal reach or non-reach, the preview presentation effect determination processing is ended, and if the variation pattern identified in S90291 is the variation pattern of super reach, the random number for announcement presentation execution determination is While extracting, it decides the presence or absence of execution of announcement production making use of the table for announcement production execution decision which is not illustrated (S90293).

  In addition, in this embodiment, the random number for determining the notice effect execution is a random number in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, although it is 100 in the range of 1 to 100 of the judgment value numbers of the random numbers for the preliminary announcement performance execution determination, the present invention is not limited to this, the range of the random numbers for the preliminary announcement performance execution determination etc. It may be determined appropriately. In addition, a random number counter for preliminary production effect execution determination for generating these random numbers for preliminary production effect execution determination is set in the RAM 90122, and the random number counter for preliminary production effect execution determination is updated for each timer interrupt in the random number update process. Ru.

  In S90293 in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the execution of the advance presentation effect is determined at a different ratio depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 90%, and the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. If the variable display result is out, the execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance effect is determined in S90293 (S90294). If it is determined in S90293 that non-execution of the notice effect is determined, the notice effect determining process is ended. If it is determined in S90293 that the execution of the notice effect is determined, it is further determined whether the variable display result is a big hit (S90295) ). If the fluctuation display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the first effect pattern, and the fact that the first effect pattern is determined is stored (S90296), and if the fluctuation display result is lost, The effect pattern of the advance effect effect is determined as the second effect pattern, and the fact that the second effect pattern is determined is stored (S90297).

  As shown in FIG. 78, with the first effect pattern of the notice effect, by driving the first movement motor 90201 by a predetermined amount according to the player's operation of the push button 9031 B, the effect body 90300 is moved from the retracted position It is an effect pattern of repeatedly moving to the first advancing position and finally positioning the effect body 90300 at the first advancing position by the player's continuous hit of the push button 9031B. The first effect pattern is also an effect pattern for displaying an effect image corresponding to the position of the effect object 90300 on the effect display device 905. On the other hand, with the second effect pattern of the advance effect, the second moving position from the withdrawal position of the effect body 90300 by driving the first moving motor 90201 by a predetermined amount according to the player's operation of the push button 9031B. The player is repeatedly moved to the second position, the player 90300 is moved to the second position, and the second player 90300U is moved from the mounting position to the upper position. It is an effect pattern to make it The second effect pattern is also an effect pattern for displaying an effect image corresponding to the position of the effect object 90300 on the effect display device 905.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 81, the advance notice effect of this embodiment is an effect to be executed during the execution period of the reach effect together with the advance effect described later. That is, the first effect pattern in this embodiment is an effect pattern (a so-called effect pattern of confirmed effect) for notifying during the reach effect of the super reach that the fluctuation display result is a big hit, and the second effect pattern is a fluctuation Although it is an effect pattern informing that the display result is a loss during the reach effect of the super reach, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the fluctuation display result is a big hit, the second effect pattern is If the 1st effect pattern is determined at a lower rate than the second effect pattern or if the 1st effect pattern is determined to be lower than the 1st effect pattern or the fluctuation display result is a loss, the fluctuation display result is a big hit It is good also as an effect pattern which suggests that it becomes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82, in the notice effect, the effect body 90300 is directed from the retracted position to the first advanced position or the second advanced position by driving the first movement motor 90201 according to the first operation of the push button 9031B. As the moving distance L2 of the moving object L moves from the retracted position toward the first advanced position or the second advanced position, the effect body 90300 (more precisely, the detector 90302) of the first photosensor 90203 The distance is longer than the distance L1 for coming out of the detection range. That is, the effect body 90300 always moves from the retracted position to outside the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 in response to the first operation of the push button 9031 B in the advance notice effect.
Then, the effect body 90300 is, for the second and subsequent operations of the push button 9031B in the preliminary announcement effect, the distance L3-1, the distance L3-2, the distance L3-3, and so on to the first advancing position and the second advancing position. The distance L3-n (n is an arbitrary natural number) is moved. The distance L3-1, the distance L3-2, the distance L3-3,... And the distance L3-n are all shorter than the distance L1 described above. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the effect body 90300 in the preliminary announcement effect is the first advancing position or the second advancing position from the retracted position above the first moving motor 90201 by the rotational drive of the first moving motor 90201. Move linearly towards the position. Therefore, the moving distance of the effect body 90300 per unit rotational driving amount of the first moving motor 90201 becomes shorter as the effect body 90300 approaches the first advancing position or the second advancing position. That is, in the notice effect of this embodiment, the moving distance L2 of the effect body 90300 according to the first operation of the push button 9031B is the longest, and it is directed to the first advancing position or the second advancing position of the following effect body 90300. Each movement distance is shortened each time the push button 9031 B is operated (L2>L1>L3-1>L3-2>L3-3>...> L3-n).

  Referring back to FIG. 75, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the advance effect execution determination flag is set, that is, whether or not the execution of the advance effect is determined (S90278). If the notice effect execution determination flag is set, a value corresponding to the period up to the start of the notice effect start is set in the notice effect start waiting timer, and the notice effect execution decision flag is cleared to proceed to S90281 (S90279, S90280), if the preliminary announcement effect execution determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to S90281 without executing S90279 and S90280.

  In S90281, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a prognostic effect determination process of determining whether or not to perform the prognostic effect, which is an effect suggesting that the preliminary effect is to be performed.

  In the precursor effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 79, the effect control CPU 90120 first specifies execution / non-execution of the precursor effect (S90501). And it is determined whether the said fluctuation | variation display result is a big hit (S90503). If the variable display result is a big hit, a random number for prognostic performance execution determination is extracted, and the presence / absence of prognostic performance execution and the production pattern are determined using a not-shown prognostic production execution determination table for big hit (S90504) . Further, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, a random number for the prognostic performance execution determination is extracted, and the presence or absence of prognostic performance execution and the production pattern are determined using a not-shown prognostic performance execution determination table (not shown) S90505).

  In addition, in this embodiment, the prognostic effect execution random number is a random number in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, although it is 100 in the range of 1 to 100 of the judgment value numbers of the random numbers for prognostic performance execution determination, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range etc. It may be determined appropriately. In addition, a random number counter for prognostic effect execution determination for generating these prognostic effect execution random numbers is set in the RAM 90122, and the prognostic effect execution random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in the random number update process. Ru.

  In S90504 and S90505 in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80 (A) and FIG. 80 (B), execution / non-execution and presentation of prognostic presentation at different rates based on whether or not announcement presentation is performed. Determine the pattern.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), when the change display result is a big hit, if the execution of the notice effect is determined, the non-execution of the turnout effect is determined at a rate of 0%. Decide to execute precursory effects with effect pattern α at percentage rate, decide to execute precursory effects with effect pattern β at rate of 20%, and execute precursor effects with effect pattern γ at 70% rate Decide to do. On the other hand, if non-execution of the advance effect is determined, the non-execution of the pre-effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and it is determined that the pro-effect is performed at the rate of 15% with the effect pattern α, 25% It is determined that the prognostic effect is to be performed with the effect pattern β at a rate of 50%, and it is determined that the prognostic effect is to be performed with the effect pattern γ at a rate of 50%.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), when the execution of the advance notice is determined, the non-execution of the autism is determined at the rate of 0%, and the rate of 80% is determined if the change display result is a loss. Decide to execute the prognostic effect with the production pattern α, decide to execute the prognostic effect with the production pattern β at a rate of 15%, and execute the prognostic effect with the production pattern γ at a rate of 5% decide. On the other hand, if non-execution of the advance effect is determined, the non-execution of the accrual effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and it is determined to execute the accrual effect at the performance pattern α at a rate of 15%, 5% It is determined that the prognostic effect is to be performed with the effect pattern β at a rate of 0, and it is determined that the prognostic effect is to be performed with the effect pattern γ at a rate of 0%.

  As described above, by determining the effect pattern of the prognostic effect and the prognostic effect, the prognostic effect is always performed when it is determined that the preliminary rendering is to be performed. In addition, by changing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the pro-active effect execution / non-execution and the pro-active effect depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or not, there is a case where the pro-active effect is executed with the effect pattern γ When the ratio at which the fluctuation display result is a big hit is set high most and then the prognostic effect is executed with the effect pattern β, when the precautionary effect is executed with the effect pattern α, the precautionary effect is not performed (non-execution) The rate at which the variable display result is a big hit can be set high in order.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (A), the effect pattern α of the prognostic effect includes the effect body 90300 disposed at the withdrawal position, the withdrawal position and the first photosensor 90203 by driving the first movement motor 90201 After reciprocating a plurality of times between the predetermined position within the detection range (within the range where the detector 90302 is detected by the first photosensor 90203), the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 from the retracted position of the effect body It is an effect pattern of reciprocating once at a predetermined position outside (outside the range where the detector 90302 is detected by the first photosensor 90203). In other words, after the effect body 90300 is reciprocated for a plurality of times within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 and then moved to a position outside the detection range of the first photosensor 90203, This is an effect pattern of returning to the retracted position which is within the detection range of the one photosensor 90203.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the effect pattern β for the admonition effect is outside the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 by driving the first moving motor 90201 for the effect body 90300 disposed at the retracted position. After being moved to the predetermined position, the semiconductor device is reciprocated a plurality of times between the predetermined position outside the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 and the predetermined position within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203. Finally, an effect pattern for moving the effect object 90300 disposed at a predetermined position outside the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 to the retracted position. That is, the effect pattern β of the pro-effect is a effect pattern that moves between the position within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 and the position outside the detection range in all the reciprocation of the effect body 90300.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 83C, the effect pattern γ of the prognostic effect is outside the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 by driving the first moving motor 90201 of the effect body 90300 disposed at the retracted position. After being moved to the predetermined position, the effect body 90300 is reciprocated a plurality of times outside the detection range of the first photosensor 90203. Finally, an effect pattern for moving the effect object 90300 disposed at a predetermined position outside the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 to the retracted position. That is, in the effect pattern γ of the protagonist effect, movement from the first retraction position of the effect body 90300 to outside the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 and movement from outside the detection range of the last first photosensor 90203 to the retraction position These are effect patterns in which the reciprocating movement of the effect body 90300 is repeatedly performed outside the detection range of the first photosensor 90203.

  After the execution of S90504 or S90505, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the execution of the predictive effect has been determined in S90504 or S90505. If the execution of the prognostic effect has been determined, the prognostic effect execution determination flag is set and the prognostic effect determination process is ended (S90507), and if the execution of the prognostic effect is not determined In the case of), the precursor effect determination process is ended without executing S90507.

  Referring back to FIG. 75, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the precursor effect execution determination flag is set, that is, whether the execution of the precursor effect is determined (S90282). If the precursor effect execution determination flag is set, a value corresponding to the period up to the start of the precursor effect setting is set in the precursor effect start waiting timer, and the precursor effect execution determination flag is cleared and the process proceeds to S90285 (S90283, S90284 ). When the precursor effect execution determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to S90285 without executing S90283 and S90284.

  In S90285, the effect control CPU 90120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S90286).

  In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 905, LED control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and for controlling the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 9031 B, and the like are sequentially arranged in time series in association with each process data n (1 to N).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 follows the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) to display the effect device (effect component as effect components) The control of the device 905, the various LEDs as rendering components, the speakers 908L and 908R as rendering components, and the operation unit (push button 9031B etc.) is executed (S90287). For example, in order to cause the effect display device 905 to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern, a command is output to the display control unit 90123. In addition, in order to control turning on / off various LEDs, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 9014. Further, in order to perform audio output from the speakers 908 L and 908 R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 9013.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the variable pattern of the effect pattern according to the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern designation command to be displayed, but the effect control CPU 90120 specifies the change pattern. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the command.

  Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (S90288). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (S90289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 90120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left middle right effect pattern to the VRAM every time the predetermined time passes, and the display control unit 90123 writes the information to the VRAM. The signal corresponding to the image data is output to the effect display device 905, and the effect display device 905 displays the image according to the signal, whereby the variation of the effect pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (S9075) (S90290).

  FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing a process (S9075) during effect design variation in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer by one (S90301, S90302, S90303). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the precursor effect start wait timer or the precursor effect in-progress flag is set, that is, whether the execution of the precursor effect is determined or whether the precursor effect is being executed. (S90304). If the precursor effect start wait timer or the precursor effect in progress flag is set, the precursor effect process is executed, and the process proceeds to S90306 (S90305), and the precursor effect start wait timer and the precursor effect in progress flag are not set The process proceeds to step S90306 without executing the precursor effect process of step S90305.

  In S90306, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the advance effect start wait timer or the informing effect execution flag is set or not, that is, whether the execution of the advance effect is determined or the informing effect is being executed. . If the preliminary production start waiting timer or the preliminary production under execution flag is set, the preliminary production processing is executed and the process proceeds to S90308 (S90307), and if the preliminary production start waiting timer and the preliminary production execution flag are not set either The process proceeds to step S90308 without executing the advance presentation processing of step S90307.

  In S90308, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the advance effect end flag is set, that is, whether or not the advance effect has already been completed. If the notice effect end flag is set, the effect retracting process is executed and the process proceeds to S90310 (S90309). If the notice effect end flag is not set, the effect retracting process of S90309 is not performed, and the process proceeds to S90310. move on.

  In step S90310, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (S90311). That is, the process timer is newly started by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table to the process timer (S90312). In addition, the control state of the rendering device (the part for effect) is changed based on the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc. set next to that (S90313). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the rendering device (for presentation) is performed according to the content of the process data (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data etc.) corresponding to the process timer. The control of the part is executed (S90314).

  Next, it is checked whether or not the fluctuation control timer has timed out (S90315). If the variation control timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 90120 displays an image of the next display screen of the left middle right display pattern (a screen to be displayed after 30 ms has passed since the last display change of the display pattern). Data is created and written to a predetermined area of the VRAM (S90316). As such, in the effect display device 905, variation control of the effect pattern is realized. The display control unit 90123 sends a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined region such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the effect display device 905. Output. As such, in the effect display device 905, the background image, the character image, and the effect pattern in the fluctuation of the effect pattern are displayed. Further, the predetermined value is reset to the fluctuation control timer, and the process proceeds to S90318 (S90317). If the fluctuation control timer has not timed out, the process advances to step S90318 without executing steps S90316 and S90317.

  In S90318, the effect control CPU 90120 checks whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (S90318). If the fluctuation time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S9076), and the effect symbol in-process process is ended (S90320). Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination designation command has been received is set (Y in S90319), the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the effect symbol variation stop process ( It updates to the value according to S9076) (S90315). Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the control shifts to control to stop the fluctuation when the symbol determination designation command is received. For example, the fluctuation pattern designation command showing a long fluctuation time due to noise etc. between boards Even when it is received, it is possible to end the fluctuation of the effect pattern when the normal fluctuation time elapses (when the fluctuation of the special symbol is ended).

  In addition, the process data in the fluctuation display of the production | presentation symbol is set to the process table currently used for the fluctuation control of the production | presentation symbol. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the fluctuation time of the effect pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n has timed out in the process of S90310, there is no process data (display control execution data, LED control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the effect control of the effect design based on the process table ends Do.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the prognostic effect process. In the prognostic effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether a prognostic effect executing flag is set (S90321). If the precursor effect in-progress flag is not set, the value of the precursor effect start wait timer is decremented by 1 (S90322), and it is determined whether the precursor effect start wait timer has timed out (S90323). If the precursor effect start waiting timer has not timed out, the precursor effect processing is ended, and if the precursor effect start waiting timer has timed out, it is further determined whether the effect pattern of the precursor effect is the effect pattern γ or not (S90324). When the effect pattern of the omen effect is the effect pattern α or the effect pattern β, whether or not the first photosensor 90203 is ON, that is, within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 where the effect body 90300 includes the retracted position It is judged whether it is located at (S90325). When the first photo sensor 90203 is not ON, that is, when the effect body 90300 is already positioned outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203, when performing the aura effect with the effect pattern α or the effect pattern β A position error notification flag indicating that the effect object 90300 is not positioned within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 is set, and the prognostic effect processing is ended (S90326). When the position error notification flag is set, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the above-described error notification process (see FIG. 72) to position the effect body 90300 within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203. Error notification to the effect that it is not

  If the effect pattern is γ in S90324 or if the first photo sensor is ON in S90325, a flag is set during the indication effect (S90327). Then, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a value according to the period of the accompaniment effect to the accrual effect period timer (S90328), and selects a process table for the accompaniment effect according to the effect pattern of the accompaniment effect (S90329). Then, the precursor effect process timer in the process data 1 of the selected precursor effect process table is started (S90330).

  In the process table for precursor effect, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 905, LED control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound of the output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Sound control execution data and the like for control are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 follows the contents of the process data 1 for precursor effect (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1) according to the effect device (effect component 905 as a effect component) Control of various LEDs as rendering components and the speakers 908L and 908R as rendering components is executed, and the prognostic processing ends (S90331). For example, in order to display an image according to the effect pattern on the effect display device 905, an instruction is output to the display control unit 90123. In addition, in order to control turning on / off various LEDs, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 9014. Further, in order to perform audio output from the speakers 908 L and 908 R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 9013.

  As described above, in the prognostic effect process, as shown in S90324 to S90331, the prognostic effect is an effect pattern in which a part of each reciprocation of the effect body 90300 is necessarily performed within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203. If it is determined to be executed with α or the effect pattern β, the position of the effect body 90300 at the start of the anticipation effect must be within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 (more accurately, the retracted position). For example, since there is a possibility that the effect body 90300 does not move within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 in each reciprocation operation of the effect body 90300, the execution of the aura effect is stopped. On the other hand, it is determined that the prognostic effect is executed by the effect pattern γ which is an effect pattern to be executed outside the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 except for the reciprocation other than the first and last movement of the effect body 90300 In the case where it is present, since the effect body 90300 is already located outside the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 which is a planned point at which the reciprocation operation is to be performed, a precursor effect effect is performed.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the prognostic effect is to be executed with the effect pattern γ, the case where the effect body 90300 at the start of the prognostic effect is located outside the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the prognostic effect is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in the case where it is determined that the prognostic effect is to be executed with the effect pattern γ, When the effect body 90300 at the start of the omen effect is located outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203, the execution of the omen effect may be stopped.

  Further, when the precursor effect executing flag is set in S90321, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the values of the precursor effect process timer and the precursor effect period timer by 1 (S90332, S90333), and the precursor effect period timer is timed out. It is determined whether it is below or not. If the precursor effect period timer has not timed out, it is further determined whether the precursor effect process timer has reached the timer (S90335). If the precursor effect process timer has timed out, switching of the precursor effect process data is performed (S90336). That is, the next precursor effect process timer is newly started by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table for precursor effect to the precursor effect process timer (S90337). In addition, the control state of the rendering device (the component for effect) is changed based on the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, the sound control execution data and the like set next to the display control execution data (S90338a). On the other hand, when the precursor effect process timer has not timed out, according to the contents (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.) of the precursor effect process data corresponding to the precursor effect process timer Control) is executed (S90338 b).

  After the execution of S90338a or S90338b, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is during a movement period out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 of the effect body 90300 based on the indication effect process data or the like (S90340). When it is not during the movement period of out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 of the effect body 90300, the admonition effect processing is ended, and in the movement period of outside of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 of the effect body 90300, It is determined whether the first photosensor 90203 is ON, that is, whether the effect body 90300 is located within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 (S90341). When the first photo sensor 90203 is OFF, that is, when the effect body 90300 is already positioned outside the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203, the precursor effect processing is ended, and the first photo sensor 90203 is ON Executes the first moving motor normal rotation drive processing for driving the first moving motor 90201 to rotate forward to move the effect body 90300 out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203, and performs the precursor effect processing It ends (S90342).

  When the precursor effect period timer has timed out in S90334, the precursor effect in-progress flag is cleared and the precursor effect processing is ended (S90343).

  FIG. 86 and FIG. 87 are flowcharts showing an example of the advance presentation processing. In the advance presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 90120 first determines whether the position error notification flag is set (S90351). If the position error notification flag is set, the notice effect processing is ended. If the position error notification flag is not set, it is determined whether the notice effect executing flag is set (S90352).

  If the flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the value of the preview effect start waiting timer by 1 (S90353), and determines whether the advance effect start wait timer has timed out (S90354) ). If the preliminary production start waiting timer has not timed out, the preliminary production processing ends, and if the preliminary production start waiting timer has run out, the preliminary production execution flag is set (S90355), and the preliminary production period timer is set. A value corresponding to the advance presentation effect period is set (S90356).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 selects the process table of the notice effect according to the effect pattern of the notice effect (S90357), and the first rotation amount counter indicating the amount by which the first movement motor 90201 is driven (rotated). The value is set to 0 (S90359). Further, the preview presentation process timer in the process data 1 of the process table for the preview presentation selected in S90357 is started (S90360).

  In the process table for precursor effect, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 905, LED control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound of the output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Sound control execution data and the like for control are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 follows the contents of the process data 1 for the advance effect (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1) according to the effect device (effect component 905 as a effect component) Control of various LEDs as rendering components and the speakers 908L and 908R as rendering components is executed, and the prognostic processing ends (S90361). For example, in order to display an image according to the effect pattern on the effect display device 905, an instruction is output to the display control unit 90123. In addition, in order to control turning on / off various LEDs, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 9014. Further, in order to perform audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13.

  On the other hand, if the preliminary rendering effect execution flag is set in S90352, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the value of the preliminary rendering process timer and the preliminary rendering period timer by 1 (S90362, S90363), and the preliminary rendering period timer It is determined whether the timer has run out (S90364). If the preliminary rendering effect period timer has not timed out, it is further determined whether the preliminary rendering effect process timer has timed out (S90365). If the preview rendering process timer has timed out, the preview rendering process data is switched (S90366). That is, by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table for preliminary presentation effect to the preliminary presentation process timer, the next preliminary presentation process timer is started anew (S90367). In addition, the control state of the rendering device (the component for effect) is changed based on the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, the sound control execution data and the like set next to the display control execution data (S90368a). On the other hand, if the preview rendering process timer has not timed out, the rendering device (stage rendering) according to the contents (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.) of the preview rendering process data corresponding to the preview rendering process timer Control) is executed (S90368 b).

  After the execution of S90368a or S90368b, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the second moving motor driving flag indicating that the second moving motor 90204 is being driven is set (S90369). If the second movement motor driving flag is set, the process proceeds to S90391. If the second movement motor driving flag is not set, the first movement motor 90201 is further operated according to the operation of the push button 9031B. It is determined whether the first movement motor driving flag, which indicates that the drive is being driven, is set (S90370). If the first movement motor driving flag is set, the process advances to step S90381. When the first movement motor driving flag is not set, that is, when the first movement motor 90201 is not driven, the effect control CPU 90120 further detects whether the operation of the push button 9031 B is present, That is, it is determined whether the push button detection signal output at the time of pressing the push button 9031 B is received (S 90371). When there is no operation detection of the push button 9031B, the advance presentation effect processing is ended, and when there is operation detection of the push button 9031B, the movement of the effect body 90300 to the first exit position or the second exit position is already completed. It is determined whether the first movement motor drive end flag indicating that it has been set is set (S90372).

  When the first movement motor drive end flag is set, the notice effect processing is ended. When the first movement motor drive end flag is not set, the first movement motor driving flag is set. Go to S90381.

  If the preview effect period timer has timed out in S90364, the flag is cleared during execution of the advance effect (S90376), and the end effect flag indicating the end of the advance effect is set, and the advance effect process is ended. .

  In S90381, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the first moving motor forward driving process for driving the first moving motor 90201 to rotate forward to move the effect body 90300 toward the first advanced position or the second advanced position. Do. Then, the rotation amount (driving amount) of the first moving motor 90201 is specified from the first rotary encoder 90202 (S90382a), and the first moving motor 90201 has rotated an amount according to the operation of the push button 9031B. It is determined whether or not (S90383). If the first movement motor 90201 has not rotated the amount according to the operation of the push button 9031 B, the advance presentation processing is ended, and the first movement motor 90 201 has rotated the amount according to the operation of the push button 9031 B If it is, the first movement motor driving flag is cleared (S90384).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 adds the rotation amount of the first movement motor 90201 specified in S90382 to the first rotation amount counter (S90386a). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies the position of the effect body 90300 from the value of the first rotation amount counter, and updates the display of the effect display device 905 and the emission color of the effect LED 90207 according to the specified position (S90386b ). In S90386b, for example, the color of the effect displayed on the effect display device 905 or the emission color of the effect LED 90207 according to the position of the effect body 90300 approaching the first advanced position or the second advanced position. Should be updated in the order of blue → green → red etc.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the value of the first rotation amount counter has become a value according to the advancing position of the effect pattern in execution, that is, the effect body 90300 has reached the advancing position according to the effect pattern It is determined whether or not (S90387). If the value of the first rotation amount counter does not correspond to the advancing position of the rendering pattern in execution, the advance presentation processing is ended, and the value of the first rotation amount counter is in the advancing position of the rendering pattern in execution If the value is in accordance, the first movement motor drive end flag indicating that all the driving of the first movement motor 90201 in the notice effect under execution has ended is set (S90388a). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the informing effect being executed is the second effect pattern (S90388b). When the effect pattern of the informing effect being executed is the first effect pattern, the informing effect process is ended, and when the effect pattern of the informing effect being executed is the second effect pattern, the second movement motor 90204 is driven. The second movement motor driving flag indicating that it is medium is set (S90389).

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the second movement motor forward rotation drive processing for driving the second movement motor 90204 to rotate forward for moving the second effect body 90300U from the mounting position to the upward position. (S90391). Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the second photosensor 90206 is ON, that is, whether or not the second effect body 90300U is located within the detection range of the second photosensor 90206 (S90392) ). If the second photo sensor 90206 is ON, the advance effect process is ended. If the second photo sensor 90206 is OFF, the second moving motor driving flag is cleared and the advance effect process is ended (S90395) ).

  FIG. 88 and FIG. 89 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect body retraction process. In the effect body retraction process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether a third retraction operation completion flag described later is set (S90401). If the third save operation completion flag is not set, it is further determined whether a second save operation completion flag described later is set (S90402). If the second retraction operation completion flag is not set, it is further determined whether or not the effect pattern of the executed advance effect is the second effect pattern (S90403).

  When the effect pattern of the executed advance effect is the second effect pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 further determines whether the second photosensor 90206 is ON (S90404 a). When the second photo sensor 90206 is OFF, the second movement motor reverse rotation drive processing for driving the second movement motor 90204 in the reverse direction is performed to move the second effect body 90300 U toward the placement position. The effect evacuation process ends (S90405).

  When the effect pattern of the preliminary effect performed in S90403 is the first effect pattern, that is, when the second effect body 90300U is already at the placement position, or in S90404, the second photosensor 90206 is ON. In the case, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether a first save operation completion flag described later is set (S90406). When the first retraction operation completion flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the first movement motor forward rotation drive processing as the first retraction operation processing, whereby the advance presentation effect is ended and the first exit The rendering object 90300 located at the position or the second exit position is moved further to the upper right as the first retraction operation (S90409).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies the amount of rotation (drive amount) of the first movement motor 90201 from the first rotary encoder 90202 (S90410), and the amount of rotation of the first movement motor 90201 specified in S90410 It is added to 1 rotation amount counter (S90411), whether or not the value of the 1st rotation amount counter becomes the value according to the 1st evacuation operation, that is, the effect body 90300 after the end of the notice effect is the first exit position or 2) It is determined whether or not a predetermined distance has been moved toward the upper right, which is a direction separating from the retracted position from the advanced position (S90412). When the value of the first rotation amount counter does not correspond to the first retraction operation, the effect retraction processing is ended, and the value of the first rotation amount counter corresponds to the value according to the first retraction operation Sets the first retraction operation completion flag indicating that movement of the effect object 90300 positioned at the first exit position or the second exit position has been completed and completion of the advance presentation effect has been completed The body evacuation processing is ended (S90413).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S90406 that the first retraction operation completion flag is set, the effect control CPU 90120 reverses the first movement motor 901 for reversely driving the first movement motor 90201 as the second retraction operation processing. By executing the driving process, the effect body 90300 is moved toward the retracted position (S90414). Then, for the effect control CPU 90120, whether or not the first photosensor 90203 is turned on, that is, within the range where the detector 90302 at which the effect body 90300 includes the retracted position is detected by the first photosensor 90203 It is determined whether it has moved to (within the first photosensor detection range) (S90415). When the first photosensor 90203 is OFF, the effect retraction processing is ended, and when the first photosensor 90203 is ON, the movement of the effects 90300 toward the retraction position is completed Is set, and the effect body retraction processing is ended.

  If it is determined in S90402 that the second retraction operation completion flag is set, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the second displacement motor 90204 to rotate in the forward direction as the third retraction operation processing. By executing the driving process, the second effect body 90300U is temporarily moved toward the rising position by a predetermined distance as a third retraction operation (S90419).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the second photosensor 90206 is ON, that is, whether or not the second effect body 90300U is located within the detection range of the second photosensor 90206 (S90420 ). If the second photosensor 90206 is ON, the effect evacuation process is ended. If the second photosensor 90206 is OFF, the effect returned to within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 after the end of the advance presentation effect In body 90300, a third retraction operation completion flag indicating that the movement of second effect body 90300U located at the placement position to the upward position is complete is set, and the effect body retraction processing is ended (S90421 ).

  If it is determined in S90401 that the third retraction operation completion flag is set, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the second photosensor 90206 is ON or not, that is, the elevation position in the third retraction operation. It is determined whether the second effect object 90300U that has moved toward the target has moved to the placement position again (S90424). When the second photosensor 90206 is turned off, the second effect body 90300 U is executed by executing the second movement motor reverse rotation drive process for driving the second movement motor 90204 in the reverse direction as the fourth retraction operation process. As the fourth retracting operation, it is moved toward the placement position again, and the effect retracting process is ended (S90425). In addition, when the second photosensor is turned on in S90424, the notice effect end flag, based on the fact that the second effect body 90300U is again located at the placement position, that is, the fourth retraction operation is completed, The first evacuation operation completion flag, the second evacuation operation completion flag, and the third evacuation operation completion flag are cleared, and the effect body evacuation processing is ended (S90426).

  Next, the operation mode of the effect body 90300 and the display mode of the effect display device 905 at the time of execution of the pro-end effect and the advance notice effect in this embodiment will be described based on FIG. 90 to FIG. First, in the variation display in the variation pattern of the super reach, when the same rendering symbol stop is stopped in each of the rendering symbol display areas 905L and 905R of “left” and “right” and reaches the reach state, FIG. As shown in (B), there may be a case where a precautionary effect is produced in which the effect body 90300 repeats reciprocating movement between the retracted position and the first advanced position.

  When the execution of the advance notice effect is determined, as shown in FIG. 90C, an image indicating that the effect display device 905 instructs the player to continuously hit the push button 9031 B after the end effect effect, and The image of the meter 905M indicating the moving distance from the retracted position of the effect object 90300 during execution of the preliminary rendering is displayed, and the preliminary rendering is started. On the other hand, when the execution of the advance notice effect is not determined, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), the effect display device 905 is instructed to continuously hit the push button 9031B after the end effect effect. An image or an image of the meter 905M is not displayed.

  Further, after the start of the notice effect, as shown in FIG. 91 (E) to FIG. 91 (H), whenever the player operates the push button 9031 B, the effect body 90300 moves from the retracted position to the first advanced position or the second advanced position. Repeat the movement to the upper right toward the advanced position. At this time, the image of the meter 905M is updated each time the effect body 90300 moves toward the second exit position (for example, the display amount of the meter 905M increases toward MAX). Further, in the effect display device 905, the effect 905E is an image so as to overlap with the effect body 90300 (in this embodiment, a spiral effect image centering on the effect body 90300 shown in FIG. 91 (F) and FIG. 91 (G) Is displayed. The image of the effect 905E moves to a position corresponding to the movement of the effect body 90300 each time the effect body 90300 moves toward the second exit position, and is gradually displayed larger. Furthermore, the light emission color of the effect LED 90207 is updated in the order of blue → green → red, etc. (in response to the effect object 90300 approaching the second exit position) according to the movement of the effect object 90300. As described above, in this embodiment, the player can easily recognize the position of the effect body 90300 during the notice effect by the image of the meter 905M and the image of the effect 905E displayed on the effect display device 905 and the light emission color of the effect LED 90207. It is possible to

  Then, when the effect pattern of the advance effect is determined to be the first effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), the effect body 90300 reaches the first exit position according to the player's continuous hit of the push button 9031B. To reach. On the other hand, when the effect pattern of the advance effect is determined to be the second effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), the effect body 90300 reaches the second position in response to the player's continuous hit of the push button 9031B. Do. Furthermore, when the effect body 90300 reaches the second position, the second effect body 90300U moves from the placement position toward the rising position (the second effect body 90300U separates from the first effect body 90300D). That is, in this embodiment, the player can easily recognize that the effect body 90300 has reached the second advancing position by moving the second effect body 90300U from the mounting position to the rising position.

  In addition, when the advance effect is executed in the second effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 92 (J) and FIG. 92 (K), after the end of the advance effect, first, the second effect body 90300U is loaded from the elevated position Move to position. Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (L) and FIG. 92 (M), when the advance presentation effect is executed in the first effect pattern, or after the movement of the second effect body 90300U to the placement position is completed, As the first retraction operation, after the rendering body 90300 further moves a predetermined distance toward the upper right from each advanced position (the first advanced position or the second advanced position), the movement is started toward the retracted position as the second retraction operation Do.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92N, when movement of the effect body 90300 into the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 including the retracted position is completed, the third retracting operation is positioned at the placement position. 2 Performer 90300U moves to the ascent position. Then, after the third retraction operation is completed based on the second effect body 90300U moving a predetermined distance toward the ascending position, the second effect body 90300U moves toward the placement position again as the fourth retraction operation. Do. By completing the movement of the second effect body 90300U to the placement position, all retraction operations of the effect body 90300 based on the execution of the advance effect are completed. In addition, after all the retraction | saving operation | movements of the effect body 90300 are completed in this way, it is derived | led-out and displayed by the combination which shows the big hit or detachment of a production | presentation pattern.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment, the effect body 90300 is provided movably between the retracted position and the second advancing position, and the effect control CPU 90120 is the first of the push buttons 9031 B in the notice effect. While stopping the effect body 90300 out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 by moving the effect body 90300 by the distance L2 toward the first exit position or the second exit position based on the operation of Since the effect body 90300 is moved toward the first exit position or the second exit position by a distance L3-n which is shorter than the distance L2 based on the second and subsequent operations of the push button 9031 B, the sensor 90300 Can be appropriately moved.

  Further, the distance L2 traveled by the effect body 90300 is longer than the distance L3-n, and the effect body 90300 moves the distance L2 based on the first operation of the push button 9031B in the notice effect, so the notice effect In the above, since the moving distance when the effect body 90300 moves first becomes long, the player can easily recognize that the effect body 90300 has moved.

  In addition, since the distance L2 is a distance for the effect body 90300 to move out of the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203, after the move of the effect body 90300 from the retracted position which is within the detection range of the first photo sensor 90203 It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience due to detection of the effect body 90300 such that it is determined by the first photosensor 90203 that the effect body 90300 has not moved toward the first exit position or the second exit position. .

  Further, in the advance notice processing shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the operation of the push button 9031 B is detected, and the normal driving of the first moving motor 90201 is started (the first advancing position of the effect body 90300 or the second advancing position) Movement of the distance L2 or L3-n toward the advanced position is started, and even if the operation of the push button 9031B is further detected until the normal rotation drive of the first movement motor 90201 ends, Since the first forward drive motor 90201 does not start to rotate normally, it is possible to prevent the rendering object 90300 from moving inappropriately.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73, in this embodiment, since the detection signal of the push button 9031 B is output only when the push button 9031 B is operated, the effect control CPU 90120 counts the number of times the push button 9031 B is operated. Can be accurately identified. Although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the detection signal of the push button 9031 B is output only when the push button 9031 B is operated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the push button 9031 B The detection signal of may be output when the operation of the push button 9031 B ends.

  Moreover, in the advance notice processing shown in FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, if the effect body 90300 reaches the advanced position according to the effect pattern (Y in S90387), the operation of the push button 9031B is further detected thereafter. Since the effect body 90300 is not moved, movement of the distance L2 or the distance L3-n is executed even though the effect body 90300 is positioned at the first exit position or the second exit position. It is possible to prevent the 90300 from being damaged.

  In addition, after the effect body 90300 moves to the first exit position or the second exit position by movement of the distance L2 or movement of the distance 3-n, the effect body retraction processing is performed, whereby the effect body 90300 is moved to the first position. Depending on whether it is located at the advanced position or the second advanced position, the rendering body 90300 can be moved by a different distance toward the retracted position.

  In addition, after the effect body 90300 is moved to the first exit position or the second exit position, the effect body retracting process shown in FIG. 88 is performed to detect the effect body 90300 as the first photo sensor 90203. It can be moved to the position where it is detected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 91, while the preview effect is being executed, the image of the effect 905E is displayed on the effect display device 905 so as to overlap the effect body 90300, and the position of the image of the effect 905E is moved by the effect body 90300. By updating and displaying according to, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the rendering effect due to the movement of the effect body 90300 and the shift of the image of the effect 905E.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, a first effect pattern in which the effect body 90300 can reach the first exit position, and a second effect pattern in which the effect body 90300 can reach the second exit position. In the case where the preview production can be performed and the variation display result is a big hit, the preview production is executed in the second rendering pattern, so the preview rendering is either the first rendering pattern or the second rendering pattern. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether it is executed, it is possible to improve the game interest.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 91, the player can update the display mode of the image of the meter 905M and the display mode of the image of the effect 905E in the notice effect according to the movement of the effect body 90300. It can be easily recognized that the effect body 90300 has moved by the display mode of the image of the meter 905M and the display mode of the image of the effect 905E.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 82, since the effect body 90300 moves linearly according to the rotation of the first moving motor 90201, the amount of movement changes according to the position of the effect body 90300. The body 90300 can be moved appropriately according to the position of the effect body 90300. Although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the moving amount of the effect body 90300 changes according to the position of the effect body 90300, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the first movement By converting the rotation of the motor 90201 into a linear movement by the configuration of a plurality of gears such as a rack and pinion, the movement amount of the rendering body can be made constant regardless of the position of the rendering body 90300. Good.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 83, in the precursor effect of this embodiment, the effect body 90300 is moved out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 in the movement of the effect body 90300 at least once, so As described above, even when the effect body 90300 is reciprocated in the vicinity of the retracted position, it is possible to detect that the effect body 90300 reciprocated.

  In addition, in the case of moving the effect body 90300 back and forth in the precursor effect, since the effect body 90300 is moved at least once within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203, the movement of the effect body 90300 at least once is first With the movement to the detection range of the photo sensor 90203, the effect body 90300 can reciprocate with a small movement amount.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 83A, the antecedent effect of this embodiment is the effect pattern α for moving the effect body 90300 out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 in the last reciprocating movement of the effect body 90300. As a result, it is possible to detect that the multiple reciprocations of the effect body 90300 end based on the fact that the effect body 90300 is not detected by the first photosensor 90203.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), in the effect pattern of this embodiment, the effect pattern β for moving the effect body 90300 out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 in all the reciprocation of the effect body 90300. By performing this operation, it is possible to continuously detect the state of the reciprocating movement of the effect body 90300.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), the prophetic effect of this embodiment is out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 except the first movement and the last movement of the effect body 90300. By executing the effect pattern γ to be executed, it is possible to detect the start and end of the reciprocation of the effect body 90300 by the first movement and the final movement of the effect body 90300.

  In addition, as shown in the precursor effect processing of FIG. 85, when the effect body 90300 is moved out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203, effects are exhibited until the first photosensor 90203 is turned OFF as shown in S90340 to S90342. Since the body 90300 is moved toward the first exit position, the effect body 90300 can be reliably moved out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203.

  When the effect pattern of the prognostic effect shown in FIG. 85 is the effect pattern γ in which the effect body 90300 is moved out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 and reciprocated, the effect body 90300 is displayed by the first photosensor 90203. Since the error notification process is not executed regardless of whether it is detected or not, it is possible to prevent the execution of unnecessary error notification.

  Further, in the progic effect shown in FIG. 85, when the effect pattern is the effect pattern α or the effect pattern β, and the effect object 90300 is not detected by the first photosensor 90203 (when the first photosensor 90203 is OFF) Since the position error notification flag is set and the error notification process (see FIG. 72) is executed, the performer 90300 is already out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 even though it is before the execution of the admonition effect The player or the store clerk or the like at the game arcade can easily recognize the situation of being positioned. In this embodiment, when the first photosensor is off at the start of the accompaniment effect, if the effect pattern of the accompaniment effect is the effect pattern α or the effect pattern β, error notification processing is executed, while Although the embodiment does not execute the error notification process if the effect pattern is the effect pattern γ, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first photosensor 90203 is turned off at the start of the adjective effect. The error notification process may be executed regardless of the effect pattern of the omen effect.

  In addition, a first effect body 90300D capable of moving the effect body 90300 between the retracted position and the second advanced position by driving the first moving motor 90201, and the first effect body 90300D is placed on the first effect body 90300D. The second effect body 90300U is configured to be movable between the mounting position and the rising position by the driving of the movement motor 90204, and the first effect body in a state where the second effect body 90300U is positioned at the mounting position. When the 90300D moves from the first exit position or the second exit position toward the retracted position, the second effect body 90300U moves to the placement position after the end of the movement, so the first effect body 90300D is advanced to the first exit position. Even if the second effect body 90300U is shifted from the placement position by the propagation of the vibration from the first effect body 90300D even if it is moved from the position or the second advanced position toward the retracted position, the second Detai 90300U can be reliably positioned in the loading position.

  Although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which “a member capable of propagating the vibration accompanying the displacement of the first movable body” in the present invention is the first effect body 90300 D, the present invention is limited to this. If it is a member that can propagate the vibration accompanying the movement of the first effect body 90300D to the second effect body 90300U instead of “the member capable of transmitting the vibration accompanying the displacement of the first movable body”, the pachinko gaming machine 901 It may be another member that constitutes the That is, the “member capable of propagating the vibration associated with the displacement of the first movable body” in the present invention is a member that does not vibrate itself but can propagate the vibration associated with the movement of the first effect body 90300D to the second effect body 90300U. Also, it refers to a member capable of transmitting a vibration to the second effect body 90300U when the first effect body 90300D moves due to the vibration caused by the movement of the first effect body 90300D. In addition, “a member capable of transmitting the vibration associated with the displacement of the first movable body” is capable of moving itself if the vibration associated with the movement of the first effect body 90300D can be transmitted to the second effect body 90300U It does not matter.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 92 (P) and FIG. 92 (Q), after the end of the notice effect, the second effect body 90300U was once moved toward the rising position outside the detection range of the second photosensor 90206. By executing the control (the fourth retraction operation) to move to the placement position later, the second effect body 90300U can be reliably positioned at the placement position.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 92 (N) to FIG. 92 (Q), when the first effect body 90300 D is positioned within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 after the end of the advance effect, the second effect body 90300 U Since it moves toward the placement position, the second effect body 90300U can be positioned at the placement position after the control to move the first effect body 90300D is finished. In this embodiment, the second effect body 90300U moves toward the placement position when the first effect body 90300D is positioned within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 after the end of the advance effect. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and while the first effect body 90300D is moving toward the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 including the retracted position after the end of the notice effect, The second effect body 90300U may move toward the placement position.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 92 (N) to FIG. 92 (Q), when the first effect body 90300 D after the end of the advance effect is located within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203, the second effect The control of moving the body 90300U to the placement position after moving the body 90300U out of the detection range of the second photo sensor 90206 (fourth retraction operation) is performed, after the movement control of the first effect body 90300D is ended. The second effect body 90300U can be reliably positioned at the mounting position without being misidentified as a part of the effect by the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in the effect body retraction process of FIGS. 88 and 89, the first effect body 90300 D until the second effect body 90300 U is detected by the second photosensor 90206 (Y in S 90404). And the following control (the first retracting operation process to the fourth retracting operation process) for moving the second effect body 90300U is not performed, so the inconvenience caused by the movement of the first effect body 90300D or the movement of the second effect body 90300U Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in the rendering object retraction processing of FIGS. 88 and 89, if the second retraction operation processing for moving the first rendering component 90300D to the retraction position is not completed, Since the third retraction operation processing for moving to the rising position and the fourth retraction operation processing for moving the second effect object 90300U to the mounting position are not executed, these third at a position other than the retraction position. Execution of the 3 evacuation operation process and the fourth evacuation operation process can prevent the first effect body 90300D and the second effect body 90300U from being damaged.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions may be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. Be For example, in the embodiment described above, the form is illustrated in which the effect body 90300 is moved between the retracted position and the first exit position or the second exit position in the notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. By moving the effect body 90300 at the time of activation of the pachinko gaming machine 901, it may be confirmed whether the effect body 90300 can be operated normally.

  In addition, when confirming whether or not the effect body 90300 is operable at the time of activation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as described above, the following operation shown in FIGS. 93 and 94 is executed as the first modification. First, it is determined by the first photosensor 90203 whether or not the effect body 90300 is located at the retracted position, and when the effect body 90300 is not located at the retracted position, as shown in FIG. 93, the CPU 90120 for effect control However, by driving the first movement motor 90201, control is performed to move the effect body 90300 to the retracted position as a non-detection operation. Further, when the effect body 90300 is located at the retracted position, the effect control CPU 90120 drives the first moving motor 90201 to detect the operation at the time of detection, by setting the effect body 90300 to the retracted position and the first advanced position or After being moved to the detection time operation position which is a position between the second advancing positions, the effect body 90300 is moved again to the retracted position.

  Furthermore, after executing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control, as shown in FIG. 93, the effect control CPU 90120 actually moves the effect body 90300 from the retracted position to the second exit position. And an actual operation confirmation operation control to move the second advanced position to the retracted position again.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 94A to 94C, the effect control CPU 90120 accelerates from the retracted position and then decelerates and stops at the second advanced position when executing operation control for actual operation check. While accelerating from the second advanced position, the control is decelerated and stopped at the retracted position. That is, in the operation control for actual operation check for confirming that the effect body 90300 can normally operate, the control speed of the effect body 90300 is changed from low speed to high speed to low speed between the retracted position and the second advanced position. Change in the order of

  On the other hand, when effect control CPU 90120 executes operation control at the time of detection, actual operation is always performed in a period in which effect object 90300 is moved from the retracted position to the second advanced position and in a period in which it is moved from the second advanced position to the retracted position. Control is performed so that the effect body 90300 operates at the lowest speed in the operation control for confirmation. Furthermore, when effect control CPU 90120 executes non-detection operation control, control is performed so that effect object 90300 always operates at the minimum speed in the operation check operation control during a period in which effect object 90300 is moved to the retracted position. Do.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the operation control for actual operation check, the operation control for detection, and the operation control for non detection, so that the performer 90300 always checks the actual operation when the operation control for non detection is performed. By operating at the lowest speed in the operation control for operation, it becomes possible to stop at any timing, so the rendering body 90300 can be positioned at the retracted position without fear of being damaged by a collision or the like.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the advance notice effect, an example is shown in which the effect of moving the effect body 90300 from the retracted position toward the first advanced position or the second advanced position is executed at each time the player operates the push button 9031B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 95 (A) to FIG. 95 (D) as the second modification, when a power failure occurs during execution of the advance presentation effect, When the power is turned on, according to the player's operation of the push button 9031 B, the effect body 90300 is not moved toward the first advancing position or the second advancing position, and the detecting element 90302 is the first photo It may be returned to the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 including the retracted position until it is detected by the sensor 90203. By doing this, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is powered on again, it is possible to return the effect body 90300 moving to the first advanced position or the second advanced position to the retracted position. As described above, when a power failure occurs during the execution of the advance effect, after moving the effect body 90300 to the retracted position, the effect body 90300 is moved in response to the operation of the push button 9031B until the advance effect is performed again. (1) By not moving to the advanced position or the second advanced position, the effect body 90300 moves toward the first advanced position or the second advanced position before the notice effect is executed, so that the game is entertaining It is possible to prevent the inconvenience such as giving the player a feeling of disbelief with regard to a drop or a notice effect.

  In the above embodiment, the moving distance L2 toward the first advancing position and the second advancing position of the first effect body 90300 in the advance notice effect is the first advancing position and the second advancing position of the effect body 90300 for the second and subsequent times. In the example illustrated in this embodiment, the effect body 90300 can be reliably moved out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 by setting the distance longer than the movement distance L3-n toward the target. For example, as shown in FIG. 96 as the third modification, the effect body 90300 is moved in the movement toward the first advancing position and the second advancing position of the effect body 90300 for the second and subsequent times in the notice effect. When passing through the front of the hold display area in the effect display device 905 or the fourth symbol indicating that the show symbol is changing, the front of the hold memory display area or the fourth symbol is displayed. In order to prevent the holding memory display area and the fourth symbol from being invisible or difficult to see from the player by stopping the effect body 90300 at the other, the moving body of the effect body 90300 by another moving distance (FIG. A distance (distance L4 in FIG. 96) longer than the distance L3) may be moved.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the movement toward the first advancing position or the second advancing position of the effect body 90300 in the notice effect, the first movement motor 90201 is previously made in accordance with the player's operation of the push button 9031B. Although the embodiment in which the directing body 90300 is moved by a predetermined distance by driving the fixed amount by a fixed amount is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first advancing position of the directing body 90300 in the notice effect and the first advancing position The moving distance toward the second advancing position may be random each time in accordance with the operation of the push button 9031B. In the case where the moving distance toward the first advancing position and the second advancing position of the effect body 90300 in the advance notice effect is randomly determined each time the push button 9031 B is operated as described above, the movement of the effect body 90300 is Every time it starts, it is determined whether or not the effect body 90300 is stopped at the hold storage display area or the front position of the fourth symbol in the movement, and when the effect body 90300 is stopped at the hold position of the hold storage display area or the fourth pattern When it is judged, the effect body 90300 is stopped immediately before the hold storage display area or the front position of the fourth symbol by correcting the moving distance of the effect body 90300, or the hold storage display area or the front of the fourth symbol You may stop at the position which passed the position.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the effect body 90300 is moved out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 in the admonition effect, the first photosensor 90203 is the effect body 90300 until the first photosensor 90203 is turned off. Although the embodiment has been illustrated in which the effect body 90300 is moved toward the first exit position until it does not detect the detector 90302 more accurately, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a fourth modification, When moving the effect body 90300 out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203 in the omen effect, the effect body 90300 is predetermined regardless of whether or not the first photosensor 90203 detects the effect body 90300. The distance may be moved. By doing this, the effect control CPU 90120 does not need to control the movement of the effect body 90300 according to whether or not the first photosensor 90203 has detected the effect body 90300. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 Control load can be reduced. In addition, as described above, when the directing body 90300 is moved by the predetermined distance regardless of whether the first photosensor 90203 detects the directing body 90300 in the admonition effect, the shifting of the directing body 90300 is ended. It is determined whether or not the first photosensor 90203 is turned on at the point in time, and when the first photosensor 90203 is turned on, the rendering body 90300 is still in spite of the completion of the movement of the rendering body 90300. It may be informed that it is located within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203. By doing this, the player, the store clerk of the game arcade, etc. can easily recognize that the effect body 90300 has not moved out of the detection range of the first photosensor 90203.

  In the above embodiment, when the first effect body 90300D after the end of the notice effect is located within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203, the second effect body 90300U is out of the detection range of the second photosensor 90206. In the embodiment, the control to move to the placement position is executed after moving to the first position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the one rendering body 90300D is positioned within the detection range of the first photosensor 90203, regardless of whether the second photosensor 90206 detects the second rendering body 90300U, the second rendering body 90300U The second effect body 90300U may be moved to the mounting position after moving the second rendering body 90300U in the direction different from the mounting position. By doing this, since it is not necessary to move the second effect body 90300U based on the detection of the second effect body 90300U by the second photo sensor 90206, the second effect body 90300U is placed at a low load control position. It can be located in

  Further, in the embodiment, after the end of the notice effect, if the second retraction operation processing for moving the first effect body 90300D to the retraction position is not completed, the third effect body 90300U is moved toward the elevation position. Although the embodiment does not execute the retraction operation processing or the fourth retraction operation processing for moving the second effect body 90300U toward the placement position, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the sixth modification The third retraction operation processing and the fourth retraction operation processing may be performed in a state in which the second retraction operation processing is not completed, that is, when the first effect body 90300D is not positioned at the retraction position. By doing this, regardless of the position of the first effect body 90300D, the second effect body 90300U can be reliably positioned at the mounting position.

  Further, although the embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the effect body 90300 is moved based on the detection of the pressing operation of the push button 9031B in the notice effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and a touch Even if the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided with detection means other than the push button 9031 B such as a sensor, a motion sensor, etc., even if the player 90300 is moved based on detection of a specific action of the player in these notice means. Good.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided with the effect display device 905 for displaying the image of the meter 905M, the effect 905E, etc. during the effect design or the notice effect, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not necessary to provide the pachinko gaming machine 901 with the effect display device 905 when not displaying the image of the meter 905M or the effect 905E during the effect design or the notice effect.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment illustrated the form which can move the effect | action body 90300 toward a retracted position, a 1st advance position, and a 2nd advance position, this invention is not limited to this, A presentation body The shape of the 90300 may be changed by moving from the retracted position toward the first advanced position or the second advanced position.

  In the embodiment, the second effect body 90300U can be moved between the mounting position, which is the position at which the second effect body 90300U is mounted on the first effect body 90300D, and the rising position, which is above the mounting position. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second effect body 90300U may be movable between the mounting position in the left-right direction or the front-rear direction, or the second The form of the effect body 90300U may be changed by moving from the mounting position to the rising position.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment illustrated the form which comprises the presentation body 90300 from 1st presentation body 90300D and 2nd presentation body 90300U, this invention is not limited to this, The presentation body 90300 is these, You may include rendering bodies (a 3rd rendering body, a 4th rendering body, etc.) other than 1st rendering body 90300D and 2nd rendering body 90300U.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the form in which the effect body 90300 is movable in the straight line direction is exemplified in the preliminary announcement effect and the preliminary announcement effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be rotatable in the effect. That is, the displacement in the present invention includes not only the movement in the linear direction but also the one in which the position of the effect body 90300 does not change while the direction of the effect body 90300 changes.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the second directing body 90300U is temporarily moved to the ascent position after the notice effect is finished, and then moved to the mounting position by way of example, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead of the second effect, the second effect body 90300U may only be moved to the placement position without being moved once to the rising position.

  Further, although the pachinko game machine 901 is illustrated as an example of a game machine in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is the inside of the game machine In addition, the number of balls that have been enclosed so as to be able to circulate and is lent out in response to a player's request for lending, and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of gaming balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines that are stored. In these enclosed game machines, not the gaming balls but points or points are awarded to the player, so the points or points given are the gaming values.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the CPU for effect control 90120 of a variation pattern indicating a variation mode such as a variation time and a type of reach effect, an example of transmitting one variation pattern specification command when starting a variation Although shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the CPU for effect control 90120 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the CPU 90103 uses, for example, the first command to change time or a change mode before reaching reach (before reaching a so-called second stop when not reaching reach). The second command indicates the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode after reaching the reach (after reaching a so-called second stop if not reaching), such as the type of reach and the presence of re-lottery effect. The command may be transmitted, or only the fluctuation time may be notified by the first command and the second command, and the effect control CPU 90120 may be used for the specific fluctuation mode executed at each timing. The selection may be made by When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending the first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. As described above, by notifying a change pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which must be stored as a change pattern specification command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the game ball is shot out from below the game area by the ball striking device, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball striking device may be pachinko game machine 901 The game ball may be launched from the upper position of the game area by providing the game ball at the upper position of the game area.

  Also, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment is exemplified in which only the big hit that can obtain many game balls is generated by opening the big winning opening in the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability variation big hit B is significantly shortened, the opening time of the big winning opening in the round game is remarkably shortened, and the occurrence of the probability variation big hitting B suddenly causes the player not to recognize that the big winning opening is opened. It may be a sudden big hit that appears to have become a definite change state. In addition, when making these definite variation big hit B the high definite probability big hit, the small hit opening the big winning opening with the same opening pattern as the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the big hit game of the positive variation big hit B, It is possible to generate a state (so-called latent state) in which it is unclear whether the gaming state after the occurrence of the probability variation big hit B or the small hit is in the high certainty state or the low certainty state.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment has illustrated the form which made the starting winning opening two in 1st starting winning opening and 2nd starting winning opening, this invention is not limited to this, and starting winning opening The number of start winning openings may be three or more.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which made the special symbol two in 1st special figure and 2nd special figure is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, Only one special symbol is one It is good also as three or more special symbols.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B respectively variably display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol as a display result, and then stop the final stop symbol. Although the present invention is not limited to this, after displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner without including the final stop symbol as a display result, the final stop symbol is displayed in a stopped state. It may be That is, the final stop symbol to be the display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

  The state advantageous to the player includes specific game states (such as a big hit) that are advantageous to the player who can acquire many game media, and plural types of specific game states (such as different expected values of game media that can be acquired) Big hit etc. with different number of rounds), high base state (time saving state) where the condition of award ball payout is more easily established than in normal gaming state, high probability gaming state (high probability state) And a special reach state (eg, super reach), and a state in which the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on a jackpot fluctuation pattern.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value At the same time, one game is ended by the variable display result being derived on the effect display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified respectively, and the winning is achieved according to the variable display result derived on the effect display device The present invention is also applicable to slot machines in which

1 Pachinko game machine 2 game board 3 game machine frame 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 image display device 5H start winning memory display area 6A normal winning ball device 6B normal variable winning ball device 7 special variable Winning ball device 8 Speaker 9 lamp 11 main board 12 effect control board 13 voice control board 14 lamp control board 15 relay board 20 normal symbol indicator 21 gate switch 22A 1st starting opening switch 22B 2nd starting opening switch 23 count switch 100 game Control microcomputer 101 ROM
102 RAM
103 CPU
104 random number circuit 105 I / O
120 CPU for production control
121 ROM
122 RAM
123 Display control unit 124 Random number circuit 125 I / O
901 Pachinko gaming machine 905 effect display device 9031B push button 90120 CPU for effect control
90201 1st movement motor 90203 1st photosensor 90204 2nd movement motor 90206 2nd photosensor 90300 effect body 90300D first effect body 90300U second effect body

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having an operation means operable by a player and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state for the player,
It comprises a predetermined effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect during the advantageous state,
Based on the operation of the operation means, it is possible to change the execution mode of the predetermined effect,
further,
A movable body displaceably provided within a range of a first position and a second position different from the first position;
Position detection means for detecting that the movable body is at the first position;
And means for controlling the displacement of the movable body, wherein the displacement control means is capable of performing repetitive displacement control to repeatedly displace the movable body a plurality of times;
Equipped with
When the displacement control means performs the repetitive displacement control for repeatedly displacing the movable body from the first position, the movable body is out of the detection region of the position detection means in at least one displacement in the repetitive displacement. A gaming machine characterized in that it is displaced.